Lexus IS200T,IS300,IS350 2016, 2016, 2016 IS, IS200T, IS350, IS300 Owner's manual

Lexus IS200T,IS300,IS350 2016, 2016, 2016 IS, IS200T, IS350, IS300 Owner's manual
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of each Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
component
4
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
5
Lexus Display
Audio system
Operating the Lexus Display Audio system
6
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
7
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
8
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
9
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
10
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information................................... 8
Reading this manual...................................12
How to search ..............................................13
Pictorial index...............................................14
1
For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving................................. 26
For safety drive............................... 28
Seat belts..........................................30
SRS airbags..................................... 36
Front passenger occupant
classification system...................47
Safety information for
children .......................................... 53
Child restraint systems ............... 54
Installing child restraints.............58
Exhaust gas precautions............68
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system....... 69
Alarm...................................................71
Theft prevention labels ...............73
2
2.
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators........................................ 76
Gauges and meters.......................81
Multi-information display ..........86
Fuel consumption
information ................................... 93
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each
component
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................................. 100
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and trunk
Doors............................................... 105
Trunk.....................................................111
Smart access system with
push-button start ....................... 116
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.......................................123
Rear seats........................................124
Driving position memory..........126
Head restraints .............................. 131
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel..............................134
Inside rear view mirror ..............136
Outside rear view mirrors....... 138
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.............................. 141
Moon roof.......................................144
3
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle ..................... 150
Cargo and luggage.................... 158
Vehicle load limits......................... 161
Trailer towing .................................162
Dinghy towing...............................163
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch.............164
Automatic transmission ............169
Turn signal lever............................175
Parking brake ................................ 177
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ..........................178
Automatic High Beam................181
Fog light switch ............................ 186
Windshield wipers and
washer ...........................................187
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .......194
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control .............................. 198
Dynamic radar cruise
control ......................................... 202
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert)..........217
Intuitive parking assist.............. 223
Lexus parking
assist monitor............................230
Driving mode select
switch............................................246
Driving assist systems ...............249
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ......... 255
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) ..............262
• The Blind Spot Monitor
function .................................... 265
• The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function .........................267
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips......................270
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Lexus Display Audio system
5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio
System .......................................... 276
Steering wheel audio
switches ........................................281
Mobile Assistant......................... 282
USB/AUX ports......................... 284
5-2. Setup
Setup menu .................................. 286
General settings......................... 287
Voice settings ..............................290
Display settings.............................291
5-3. Using the audio system
Selecting the audio
source.......................................... 292
Optimal use of the audio
system.......................................... 293
Audio settings ............................. 294
Audio menu screen
operation.....................................297
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation..........................300
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation................306
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod.....................312
Listening USB memory
device ............................................315
Using the AUX port ...................319
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Steps for using Bluetooth®
devices ........................................320
Registering a Bluetooth®
device .......................................... 322
Selecting a Bluetooth®
device .......................................... 323
Connecting a Bluetooth®
audio player .............................. 324
Connecting a Bluetooth®
phone........................................... 325
Displaying a Bluetooth®
device details............................ 326
Detailed Bluetooth®
settings .........................................327
5-8. Bluetooth® Audio
Listening to Bluetooth®
Audio ........................................... 328
5
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using a Bluetooth®
Phone...........................................330
Making a call................................ 332
Receiving a call........................... 335
Speaking on the phone ........... 336
Using a Bluetooth® phone
message......................................338
Using the steering wheel
switches ......................................340
Bluetooth® phone
settings ..........................................341
5-10. Phonebook
Contact settings.........................343
Messaging setting .....................346
5-11. Bluetooth®
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ................... 347
Bluetooth® .....................................351
5-12. Other function
“Information” screen................. 356
USB photo....................................358
Weather information ................360
Voice command system............361
LEXUS Enform Remote .........365
6
Interior features
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system
Automatic air conditioning
system..........................................368
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/
seat ventilators.......................... 376
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ..........................378
• Interior lights...........................379
• Personal lights ........................379
6-3. Using the storage
features
List of storage features ............. 381
• Glove box ...............................382
• Console box ..........................382
• Cup holders/
bottle holders ........................383
Trunk features..............................385
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features............ 387
• Sun visors ................................ 387
• Vanity mirrors........................ 387
• Clock ........................................ 387
• Power outlet...........................388
• Armrest....................................389
• Rear sunshade ......................389
• Assist grips .............................. 391
• Coat hooks.............................. 391
Garage door opener ............... 392
Compass ........................................397
LEXUS Enform Safety
Connect......................................400
7
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................................419
Hood.................................................421
Positioning a floor jack..............422
Engine compartment............... 423
Tires.................................................. 434
Tire inflation pressure ............... 443
Wheels........................................... 446
Air conditioning filter ...............448
Electronic key battery..............450
Checking and replacing
fuses...............................................452
Light bulbs .................................... 455
8
When trouble arises
Maintenance and care
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ................406
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................409
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ..............................412
General maintenance................415
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs..................................... 418
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .................. 466
If your vehicle has
to be stopped
in an emergency.......................467
8-2. Steps to take
in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................468
If you think something
is wrong........................................ 474
Fuel pump shut off system.......475
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds .......................................... 476
If a warning message
is displayed ................................ 482
If you have a flat tire .................. 496
If the engine will not start........506
7
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P .....................508
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............509
If the vehicle battery
is discharged...............................512
If your vehicle overheats...........516
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................................520
9
Vehicle specifications
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ...................524
Fuel information.......................... 537
Tire information...........................540
10
For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners............................................ 564
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in French) ........565
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in French) ........ 566
Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ................................ 576
Alphabetical index ................................580
1
2
3
4
5
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ............ 552
6
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize...........................561
7
8
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
Lexus Enform connected services consists of five products:
• Lexus Enform Safety Connect
• Lexus Enform Service Connect
• Lexus Enform Remote
• Lexus Enform Destinations
• Lexus Enform App Suite
For availability and to learn more, visit http://www.lexus.com/enform
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9
• Intuitive parking assist
• Rear view monitor system
10
8
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your
vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However,
because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to
make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your
vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from
under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage
check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any
damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with
non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems
resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic
systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Dynamic radar cruise control system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● Vehicle dynamics integrated management
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9
Vehicle data recording
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is
equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle
is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit.
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those
services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
10
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
11
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as
they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS
airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or
by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and
certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which
could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or
pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the
driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a
collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon
roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
12
Reading this manual
CAUTION:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury
to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Indicates the action (pushing,
turning, etc.) used to operate
switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”,
or “Do not let this happen”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
13
How to search
■ Searching by name
• Alphabetical index............... P. 580
■ Searching by installation position
• Pictorial index ..............................P. 14
■ Searching by symptom or sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)...................P. 576
■ Searching by title
• Table of contents.......................... P. 2
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
14
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■ Exterior
The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (P. 456)
1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 105
2
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 111
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 105
Opening/closing the side windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 509
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477, 484
Opening from inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 111
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 111
Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 509
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477, 484
3 Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 138
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 138
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 138
Driving position memory* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 126
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
15
Pictorial index
4
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 187
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 270
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 407
5 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 194
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 526
6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 434
Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 534
Winter tires/tire chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 270
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 434
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 496
7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 421
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 421
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 516
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 484
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 455, Watts: P. 536)
8 Headlights/parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 178
9 Fog lights* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 186
10 Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 175
11 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 178
12 Stop lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
13 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 178
14 Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 169
15 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 178
*: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
16
Pictorial index
■ Instrument panel
1
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
2
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 169
Starting the engine/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 164
Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 506
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 492
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 169
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 468
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 508
3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 81
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 81
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 76
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 476
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
17
Pictorial index
4
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 86
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 86
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 482
5 Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 177
Applying/releasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 177
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 271
Warning buzzer/message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 482
6 Turn signal lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 175
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 178
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 178
Fog lights*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 186
7
Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 187
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 433
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 489
8 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 466
9 Trunk opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 111
10 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 421
11 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 134
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 134
Driving position memory*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 126
12 Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 134
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 134
13 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 368
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 368
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372
14 Audio system*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276
Hands-free system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 330
15 Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 112
*1: If equipped
*2: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
18
Pictorial index
■ Switches
1
Automatic high beam switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 181
2
Windshield wiper de-icer switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372
3 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 83
4
Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 84
5 Rear sunshade switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 389
6 Intuitive parking assist switch*1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 223
7
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 262
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
19
Pictorial index
1
Driving position memory switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 126
2
Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 138
3 Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 107
4
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
5 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
6 Tire pressure warning reset switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 436
7
PCS OFF switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 256
*1: If equipped
*2: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
20
Pictorial index
1
Audio remote control switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 281
2
Paddle shift switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171
3 Meter control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 87
4
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
5 Cruise control switch
Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 198
Dynamic radar cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
6 LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 217
7
Talk switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 340
8 Telephone switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 340
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
21
Pictorial index
1
Seat heater switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 377
2
Seat ventilator switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 377
3 Heated steering wheel switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
4
Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 246
5 VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 251
6 Snow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 170
7
Remote Touch*2, 3
8 Lexus Display Audio controller*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 278
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
*2: If equipped
*3: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
22
Pictorial index
■ Interior
1
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 36
2
Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 26
3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123
4
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 131
5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 30
6 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 382
7
Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 107
8 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 383
9 Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 391
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Pictorial index
1
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 136
2
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 387
23
3 Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 387
4
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 379
Personal lights*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 379
5 Moon roof switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 144
6 “SOS” button*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 400
7
Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392
*1: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*2: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
24
Pictorial index
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
25
For safety and security
1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving................................. 26
For safety drive...............................28
Seat belts ..........................................30
SRS airbags .....................................36
Front passenger occupant
classification system...................47
Safety information for
children ..........................................53
Child restraint systems ...............54
Installing child restraints.............58
Exhaust gas precautions............68
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ............................................. 69
Alarm ...................................................71
Theft prevention labels ............... 73
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
26
1-1. For safe use
Before driving
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and
model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1
Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.
2
Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.
*: Always align the
*
marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
27
CAUTION
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in
P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the floor
mat.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to
stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
28
1-1. For safe use
For safety drive
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before
driving.
Correct driving posture
1
Adjust the angle of the seatback so
that you are sitting straight up and so
that you do not have to lean forward
to steer. (P. 123)
2
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the elbow
when gripping the steering wheel.
(P. 123)
3
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to
the top of your ears. (P. 131)
4
Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 30)
Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (P. 30)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 54)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
29
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside
rear view mirrors properly. (P. 136, 138)
CAUTION
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop
the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving
and take a break immediately.
30
1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1
To fasten the seat belt, push the plate
into the buckle until a click sound is
heard.
2
To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Release button
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
31
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release button.
2
Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats for all models and outboard rear
seats of some models)
The pretensioners help the seat belts to
quickly restrain the occupants by
retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal collision.
The front seat belt pretensioners also
activate when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe side collision.
The pretensioners do not activate in the
event of a minor frontal impact, a minor
side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle
rollover.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.
1
32
1-1. For safe use
■ After the rear center seat belt has been used
Stow the buckle as shown.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can
move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to
hold a child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and
then pull the belt out once more. (P. 58)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 54)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow
the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 30)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first
collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your
Lexus dealer free of charge.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
33
CAUTION
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 30)
Women who are pregnant should position the
lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the
same manner as other occupants, extending
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder
and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of
the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer
death or serious injury as a result of sudden
braking or a collision.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The
seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in
the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
34
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 30)
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the
seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder.
The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious
injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 31)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in
the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do
not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an
occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a
serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling
may lead to incorrect operation.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
35
CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another
person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not
on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
NOTICE
1
36
1-1. For safe use
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work
together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
◆ SRS front airbags
1
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components
2
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
37
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
3
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
4
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
1
For safety and security
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
38
1-1. For safe use
SRS airbag system components
1
Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
9
Front side airbags
10
SRS warning light
2
Side impact sensors (front doors)
11
Driver airbag
3
Knee airbags
12
Rear side airbags
4
Front passenger airbag
13
Side impact sensors (rear)
5
Curtain shield airbags
14
Driver’s seat position sensor
6
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
15
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
7
Seat belt pretensioners and force
limiters
16
Airbag sensor assembly
17
8
Side impact sensors (front)
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
18
Front impact sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the
US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly
(ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information
includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
39
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear
margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to
your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of
the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward
your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel
controls.
40
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been connected
to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt
extender has not also been fastened to the
latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though
the seat belt has not been connected. In this
case, the SRS front airbags may not activate
correctly in a collision, resulting in death or
serious injury in the event of a collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The
front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously
injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front
passenger seat. (P. 54)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
41
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the
knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold
items on their knees.
or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passen-
ger seats toward the door or put their head or
hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when the
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags
deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as a
door, windshield glass, side door glass, front
or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail
1
42
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could
become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain
shield airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate
as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the
side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may not deploy
in the event of a collision.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
43
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the
extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the
seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the
“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the
level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (P. 400)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without
consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate)
accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
44
1-1. For safe use
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set thresh-
old level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30
km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will
activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 47)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle
cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate
speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
45
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of
the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
bags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a
collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield air-
1
46
1-1. For safe use
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the SRS front
airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is
damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was
involved in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-
board near the front passenger airbag or
lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or
roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
47
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
1
For safety and security
1
Seat belt reminder light
2
SRS warning light
3
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
4
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
48
1-1. For safe use
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2 or flashing*3
Indicator/
warning light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Devices
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■ Child*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF” or
“AIR BAG ON”*4
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2 or
flashing*3
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated or
activated*4
Indicator/
warning light
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Devices
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated or
activated*4
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
49
1-1. For safe use
■ Child restraint system with infant*5
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”*6
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2 or
flashing*3
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Devices
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Devices
Deactivated
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
1
50
1-1. For safe use
■ There is a malfunction in the system
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Devices
Deactivated
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat,
the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can
be the physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger
seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 54)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the
child restraint system properly. (P. 58)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
51
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat
belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger may not
activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback
pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the
front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the
seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
52
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches the rear seat. This
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that
the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it
does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully
rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (P. 58)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the
SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger
occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
● Do not place anything between the console box and front passenger seat. Otherwise, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper
operation of the airbags.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling. If
the head restraint is left in contact with the ceiling, the system may not detect the front
passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
53
Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental con-
1
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid
For safety and security
tact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
CAUTION
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof
or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
54
1-1. For safe use
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/
shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child
restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer
than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to
the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint
system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 58)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
55
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the
age and size of the child:

Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

Forward facing  Convertible
seat
1
For safety and security

Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the
vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 30)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
56
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age
and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint
system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior. This may cause death or serious injury to the child in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the
size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and
always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front
or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender
connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front, center and rear pillars or roof side rails from which
the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured
properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden
stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
57
CAUTION
■ When children are in the vehicle
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do
not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event
of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
58
1-1. For safe use
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure
child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the
top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seats, behind the anchor
covers.
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism (ALR/
ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)
(P. 32)
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for each
rear seat.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
59
Installation with LATCH system
1
Remove the head restraint if it
interferes with your child restraint
system.
1
For safety and security

Type A
2
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
60

1-1. For safe use
Type B
2
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
61
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function
belt)
■ Rear-facing  Infant seat/convertible seat
1
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear of
the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
3
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
2
1
62
1-1. For safe use
4
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted
to a point where there is no slack in
the belt, pull the belt to check that it
cannot be extended.
■ Forward-facing Convertible seat
1
Remove the head restraint if it
interferes with your child restraint
system.
2
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
3
63
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
1
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
5
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted
to a point where there is no slack in
the belt, pull the belt to check that it
cannot be extended.
6
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 65)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
4
64
1-1. For safe use
■ Booster seat
1
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
2
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer’s instructions
and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 30)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
65
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1
Remove the head restraint if it interferes with your child restraint system.
1
Secure the child restraint system
using the seat belt or LATCH
anchors.
3
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be
used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
For safety and security
2
66
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to
the child. (P. 32)
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the
child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers
may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does
not interfere with the child restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-1. For safe use
67
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat as far
back as possible, with the seatback close to the child restraint system.
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s
neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure
that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly
across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child
restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will
not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or
an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to
the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerve or an
accident.
68
1-1. For safe use
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.
CAUTION
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the
windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the
engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure
that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing.
If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused
by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle
inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-2. Theft deterrent system
69
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s onboard computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after the
engine switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the engine switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key registered to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee
absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
70
1-2. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-2. Theft deterrent system
71
Alarm
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system will be set
automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being
on to flashing when the system is set.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors or open the trunk.
● Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start
the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
For safety and security
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the
entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock
again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
72
1-2. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the
trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using a
inside lock button.
● The battery is recharged or replaced when the
vehicle is locked. (P. 514)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to
prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● The doors are unlocked manually without the mechanical key and the alarm is triggered.
● While the alarm is operating, the doors are unlocked manually without the mechanical
key.
● When recharging or replacing the battery
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1-2. Theft deterrent system
73
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the vehicle
to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating
the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
1
For safety and security
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
74
1-2. Theft deterrent system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
75
Instrument cluster
2
2.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators........................................76
Gauges and meters ...................... 81
Multi-information display ..........86
Fuel consumption
information ................................... 93
76
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel
inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning
lights and indicators illuminated.

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target
region.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
77
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle systems.
*1
Brake system warning light
(P. 476)
(U.S.A.)
*1
*1, 2
(if equipped)
Brake system warning light
(P. 476)
Pre-collision system warning light
(P. 477)
*1
Slip indicator (P. 477)
2
(Canada)
*1
Charging system warning
light (P. 476)
Malfunction indicator lamp
(P. 476)
*1
*1
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
(P. 477)
Open door warning light
(P. 477)
(U.S.A.)
*1
Malfunction indicator lamp
(P. 476)
Low fuel level warning light
(P. 477)
SRS warning light
(P. 476)
Seat belt reminder light
(P. 477)
(Canada)
*1
*1
ABS warning light
(P. 476)
*1
Master warning light
(P. 477)
(U.S.A.)
*1
ABS warning light
(P. 476)
(Canada)
*1
Electric power steering system warning light
(P. 477)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
*1
Tire pressure warning light
(P. 478)
Instrument cluster
*1
78
2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the light
does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 175)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Headlight indicator
(P. 178)
Tail light indicator
(P. 178)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 179)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
Automatic High Beam indicator (P. 181)
(if equipped)
*1, 2
*1
*1, 3
(if equipped)
Fog light indicator
(P. 186)
*4, 5
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 198, 202)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise control indicator (P. 202)
Cruise control “SET” indicator (P. 198, 202)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
*6
*7
*1
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) indicator (P. 217)
Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 223)
Slip indicator (P. 250)
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 251)
Pre-collision system warning light
(P. 256)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
outside rear view mirror
indicators (P. 262)
Security indicator
(P. 69, 71)
Low outside temperature
indicator (P. 81)
Eco Driving Indicator Light
(P. 91)
2. Instrument cluster
*8
Eco drive mode indicator
(P. 246)
*9
79
“SPORT S+” indicator
(P. 246)
(if equipped)
*9
*8
*9
Eco drive mode indicator
(P. 246)
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 246)
*8
*9
Snow mode indicator
(P. 170)
*1, 6
“AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator (P. 47)
(if equipped)
*9
“SPORT S” indicator
(P. 246)
(if equipped)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the light
does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes faster than usual to
indicate that the system is operating.
*
4:
In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate
in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the BSM main
switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will
turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off,
there may be a malfunction in the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*5: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*6: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37F (3C) or lower, the indicator
will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.
* Except F SPORT models
*9: F SPORT models
8:
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2
Instrument cluster
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 246)
Snow mode indicator
(P. 170)
80
2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when
you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
81
Gauges and meters

Except F SPORT models
2
F SPORT models (when the main meter is in the center position)

F SPORT models (when the main meter is in the right-side position)
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Instrument cluster

82
1
2. Instrument cluster
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
2
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
3
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature
is 37°F (3°C) or lower.
4 Shift position and gear position (P. 169)
5
Speedometer
6
Fuel gauge
7
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P. 86)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P. 482)
8
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
83
Changing the display

Odometer/Trip meter
Switches between odometer and trip
meter displays. When the trip meter is
displayed, pressing and holding the
button will reset the trip meter.
2
Main meter (F SPORT models)
Moves between center and right-side
positions.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Instrument cluster

84
2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1
Darker
2
Brighter
■ The meters and display illuminate when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted
individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail
lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made
to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the
display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage,
tunnel, etc.)
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, a pop-up display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display or the odometer/trip meter screen (F SPORT models only).
The pop-up display function can be set on/off. (P. 89)
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■ Customization
The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display. (P. 86)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
85
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates
the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red
zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the
engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 516)
2
Instrument cluster
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
86
2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle
data.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (P. 87)
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the
meter control switches.
Dynamic radar cruise control operational status
(vehicles with a dynamic radar cruise control)
Select to display the operational status of the dynamic radar cruise control.
(P. 202)
The
tab will change to
when the vehicle is in constant speed
control mode. (P. 208)
If LDA (Lane Departure Alert) is activated, the operational status of the LDA
system will also be displayed. (If equipped) (P. 219)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) operational status
(vehicles with LDA but without a dynamic radar cruise control)
Select to display the operational status of the LDA. (P. 219)
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is
detected. (P. 482)
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (P. 89)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
87
◆ Operating the meter control switches
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.
1
Select an item/change pages
2
Enter/Set

Except F SPORT models
3
Press: Displays the screen registered to
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be displayed.
When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the screen. If the
selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be shown.

F SPORT models
3
Move the main meter
4
Return to the previous screen
Drive Information
■ Current fuel consumption*1
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
■ Average fuel economy (after reset/after start/after refuel)*1, 2
Displays the average fuel economy since the function was reset, the engine
was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively
■ Average vehicle speed (after reset/after start)*1, 2
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the
engine was started, respectively
■ Elapsed time (after reset/after start)*1, 2
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the engine was
started, respectively
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Instrument cluster
Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen to
2
88
2. Instrument cluster
■ Distance (driving range/after start)*1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity
of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the engine was started respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result,
the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be
updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning
the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
■ Eco Driving Indicator
P. 91
■ Boost Meter/Oil Temperature Gauge/Oil Pressure Gauge (F SPORT
models for IS200t)
Boost Meter:
Displays the boost pressure. The display changes colors when the set pressure is exceeded.
Oil Temperature Gauge:
Displays the temperature of the engine oil. The display flashes when the
engine oil exceeds 284°F (140°C).
Oil Pressure Gauge:
Displays the oil pressure for the engine interior. A buzzer sounds and warning
message is displayed when the oil pressure gets low. (P. 486)
Depending on the road conditions, temperature, vehicle speed, etc., the actual
vehicle condition on the display screen may differ.
Use the display screen as a reference.
■ Tire inflation pressure
P. 435
■ Gear positions
P. 173
* : Displayed when the item is set in “Drive Info 1” or “Drive Info 2”. Use these values as a
1
reference.
*2: Resetting
The following displays can be reset: average fuel consumption after reset, average
vehicle speed after reset, and elapsed time after reset.
• To reset, display the desired item and press and hold
.
• If both displayed items are resettable, a reset selection screen will appear.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
89
Settings display
■ Language
Select to change the language on the display.
■ Units
Select to change the unit of measure for fuel consumption.
■ Maintenance system
Select to reset the maintenance data after the required maintenance is performed. (P. 413)
2
■ Eco Driving Indicator Light
■
switch settings (except F SPORT models)
Displays a procedure to register a desired screen to
.
You can register 1 screen as a shortcut, which can be displayed by pressing
. (P. 87)
■ Drive information 1/Drive information 2
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on the “Drive Info 1” screen
and “Drive Info 2” screen respectively. (P. 87)
■ Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations, on/off.
• Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system
(if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system
• Dynamic radar cruise control operation display (if equipped)
• Instrument panel brightness adjustment display
• Main meter switch operation display (F SPORT models)
■ Accent color (except F SPORT models)
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the cursor color.
■ Needle (F SPORT models)
Select to change the needle color for the tachometer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Instrument cluster
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light.
90
2. Instrument cluster
■ Speed indicator (F SPORT models)
Select to set the speed indicator on/
off.
When set to on, both sides of the displayed speed unit will turn yellow
when the vehicle reaches a set
speed.
Selectable speed range:
30 mph to 100 mph (50 km/h to
160 km/h)*
The indicator will illuminate in yellow at an optionally set speed and red at the fixed
high speed.
*: Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
■ Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
Select to set the rev indicator on/off.
When set to on, the tachometer will
show a ring-shaped indicator in red
when the engine reaches a set speed.
Selectable engine speed range:
IS350/IS300: 2000 rpm to 6600
rpm
IS200t: 2000 rpm to 6100 rpm
■ Rev peak (F SPORT models)
Select to set the rev peak on/off.
When set to on and the engine speed
reaches or exceeds 5000 rpm, an
afterimage of the tachometer will be
displayed at the highest engine
speed for approximately 0.5 seconds.
■ Initialization
Select to reset the meter display settings. (P. 553)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
91
■ Eco Driving Indicator
1
2
3
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● A paddle shift switch is operated.
● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (P. 246)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
■ Suspension of the settings display
In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control switches will be
suspended.
● When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
● When the vehicle begins to move
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable
radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ Liquid crystal display
P. 84
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2
Instrument cluster
4
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn
on. When the acceleration exceeds the Zone
of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped,
the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with current
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of Eco
driving, the right side of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
Zone of Eco driving
92
2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information
display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing
rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or
injury.
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
93
Fuel consumption information
Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the navigation system
screen or the Lexus Display Audio screen.

Navigation system

Lexus Display Audio system
2
Instrument cluster
1
Navigation system screen
1
Lexus Display Audio screen
2
“MENU” button
2
“MENU” button
3
Remote Touch knob
3
Lexus Display Audio controller
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
94
2. Instrument cluster
Trip information

Navigation system
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Info” on the
“Menu” screen, and then select “Fuel
Consumption”.
If the “Past Record” screen is displayed,
select “Trip Information”.
1
Resetting the consumption data
2
Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
3
Displays the average vehicle speed
since the engine was started.
4
Displays the elapsed time since the
engine was started.
5
Cruising range (P. 97)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster

95
Lexus Display Audio system
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller, then select
“Info” on the “Menu” screen, and then
select “Fuel Consumption”.
If the “Trip Information” screen does not
appear, move the controller to the right
and select “Trip Information”.
Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
2
Displays the average vehicle speed
since the engine was started.
3
Displays the elapsed time since the
engine was started.
4
Cruising range (P. 97)
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2
Instrument cluster
1
96
2. Instrument cluster
Past record

Navigation system
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen, and then select “Fuel Consumption”.
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
1
Resetting the past record data
2
Best recorded fuel consumption
3
Average fuel consumption
4
Previous fuel consumption record
5
Updating the average fuel consumption data

Lexus Display Audio system
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then select
“Info” on the “Menu” screen, and then select “Fuel Consumption”.
If the “Past Record” screen does not appear, move the controller to the right and
select “Past Record”.
1
Previous fuel consumption record
2
Average fuel consumption
3
Best recorded fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and
the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average
fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2. Instrument cluster
97
■ Updating the past record data
Navigation system
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel
consumption again.
 Lexus Display Audio system
Update the average fuel consumption by moving the controller to the left and select
“Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
 Navigation system
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
 Lexus Display Audio system
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by moving the controller to the left and select
“Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

Instrument cluster
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
2
98
2. Instrument cluster
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
99
Operation of
each component
3
3-1. Key information
Keys ..................................................100
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and trunk
Doors ...............................................105
Trunk.................................................... 111
Smart access system with
push-button start........................116
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 123
Rear seats........................................124
Driving position memory..........126
Head restraints ..............................131
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............................. 134
Inside rear view mirror.............. 136
Outside rear view mirrors....... 138
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows..............................141
Moon roof.......................................144
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
100
3-1. Key information
Keys
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
1
• Operating the smart access system
with push-button start (P. 116)
• Operating the wireless remote control function
2
Mechanical keys
3
Key number plate
4
Card key (electronic key) (if
equipped)
Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (P. 116)
Wireless remote control
1
Locks the doors (P. 105)
2
Unlocks the doors (P. 105)
3
Opens the windows and moon roof*
(P. 105)
4
Opens the trunk (P. 111)
5
Sounds the alarm (P. 101)
*: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-1. Key information
101
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key only
has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it
over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it
in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
or the entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the mechanical
key. (P. 509)
When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
■ Panic mode
3
102
3-1. Key information
■ Card key (if equipped)
● The card key is not waterproof.
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem
arises, such as when the card key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a
pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card key,
insert it while pressing the lock release button.
● If the battery cover is not installed and the bat-
tery falls out or if the battery was removed
because the key got wet, reinstall the battery
with the positive terminal facing the Lexus
emblem.
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Set the luggage security system (P. 112) on and lock the glove box (P. 382) as circumstances demand.
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another
mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate
in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic
key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally.
Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere
with the operation of the aircraft.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-1. Key information
103
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a
half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine is stopped.
(P. 493)
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 450)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the
following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■ Replacing the battery
P. 450
■ Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus
dealer for details.
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
104
3-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio
systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are
turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the
electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other keyrelated problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the
card key, to your Lexus dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that
were provided with your vehicle.
■ Handling the card key
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key. Doing
so may damage the card key.
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the
battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus
dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
105
Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside
◆ Smart access system with push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
1
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s front door handle to unlock
all the doors.*
2
Touch the lock sensor (indentation on the upper part of the front door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
◆ Wireless remote control
1
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
2
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Press and hold to open the windows
and moon roof.*
*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 109)
106
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been
locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the
security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Welcome light illumination control
The front position, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night when the
doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch
is in the “AUTO” position.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle
If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the same
time.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 71)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (P. 509)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 450)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
107
Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
◆ Door lock switches
1
Locks all the doors
2
Unlocks all the doors
◆ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
2
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
1
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be
detected correctly and the door may be locked.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
1
3
108
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle when the lock is set.
1
Unlock
2
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push
down on each rear door switch to lock
both rear doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 552.
Function
Speed linked door locking function
Operation
All doors are automatically locked when
vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
All doors are automatically locked when
Shift position linked door locking function shifting the shift lever to position other
than P.
Shift position linked door unlocking func- All doors are automatically unlocked
tion
when shifting the shift lever to P.
Driver's door linked door unlocking func- All doors are automatically unlocked
tion
when driver’s door is opened.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
109
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
,
or
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2 .)
2
Multi-information
display
Unlocking function
Beep
Holding the driver’s door handle
unlocks only the driver’s door.
Holding either front door handle Exterior: Beeps twice
unlocks all the doors.
Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If
a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be locked
again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 71)
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 509)
■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start
or wireless remote control
P. 118
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Holding the front passenger’s Interior: Pings once
door handle unlocks all the
doors.
110
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown out of the
vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful with the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
111
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
3
◆ Smart access system with push-button start
While carrying the electronic key,
press the button on the trunk lid.
When all the doors are unlocked with
the power door lock system, the
trunk can be opened without carrying the electronic key.
◆ Wireless remote control
Press and hold the switch.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
112
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
When closing the trunk
Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk
without applying force to the side and
push the trunk down from the outside
to close it.
Luggage security system
To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, the luggage security system
can be set to on.
1
Move the luggage security system
levers to the lock position.
2
To disable the trunk opener, turn the
main switch in the glove box off
1
On
2
Off
When the main switch is off, the trunk
lid cannot be opened even with the
wireless remote control or entry
function.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
113
■ Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
● When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 509)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk. (P. 509)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 450)
■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
P. 102
■ Customization
The trunk unlocking operation can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 552)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk
lid.
● If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent
theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
● If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key may not be
detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing
the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before
closing the trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is
unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glowin-the-dark lever located on the inside of the
trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
114
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may
open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may
be thrown out, causing an accident.
● Do not allow children to play in the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion,
suffocation or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands,
head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
■ Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are
susceptible to death or serious injury.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
115
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it.
Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is
about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move
abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to
prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk
handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it
may result in hands or arms being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such
additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is
opened.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the trunk lid is fully open and secure
before using the trunk.
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic
key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The
driver should always carry the electronic key.
● Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 105)
● Opens the trunk (P. 111)
● Starts the engine (P. 164)
■ Antenna location
1
2
3
4
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the trunk
Antenna outside the trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
an outside door handle. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be operated.)
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
117
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation
for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take
some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or
longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or
longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any door except the driver’s door. In this case,
hold the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or mechanical key, to
unlock the doors.
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart
access system with push-button start cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press any of the
electronic key buttons.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
Press
3
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following
situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping:
P. 509)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio
waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
119
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are
changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets
when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be
detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the
outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or
unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used
to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine
if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range.
(The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 30 seconds if the doors
are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near
the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or
unlock operation.
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be
shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction
procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take
care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (P. 117)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car
wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc.
Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the
lower part of the door handle.
● A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the door unlock sensor
and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the door handle again.
● Unlocking the vehicle may take more time if another electronic key is within the effective range.
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
(P. 552)
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the elec-
tronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the
vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not
be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
● Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location
of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (P. 113)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 509)
● Starting the engine: P. 510
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized
setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 105, 111, 509)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: P. 510
● Stopping the engine: P. 164
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
121
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
FCC ID: HYQ14CBB
FCC ID: NI4TMLF12-1
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

Operation of each component
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the
smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 116)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of
radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if
you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
123
Front seats
Adjustment procedure
3
Seat position adjustment
2
Seatback angle adjustment
3
Seat cushion (front) angle adjust- 5 Lumbar support adjustment (if
equipped)
ment
4
Seat cushion (rear) angle adjustment
■ Power easy access system (if equipped)
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 126)
■ When adjusting the seat
● Take care when adjusting the seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling.
● When folding down a rear seatback, if it interferes with a front seatback, adjust the front
seat position so that the seats no longer interfere with each other. However, if adjusting
the front seat position causes the correct driving posture to not be maintained, return
the rear seatback to its original position. (P. 124)
CAUTION
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not
injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk
of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
1
124
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Rear seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded down.
Folding down the rear seatbacks
1
Check that the luggage security system lever in the trunk is in the unlock
position.
2
Pull the seatback lock release lever
and fold the seatback down.
To return the rear seatbacks to their
original position, lift them up until they
lock.
Luggage security system
P. 112
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
125
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When folding the rear seatbacks down
● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
● Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked in position by lightly pushing it back
and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked, the red
marking will be visible on the seatback lock
release knob. Make sure that the red marking
is not visible.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
3
126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Driving position memory
This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to
suit your preferences.
Power easy access system
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to
enter and exit the vehicle easily.
When all of the following have been
performed, the driver’s seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to
a position that allows driver to enter
and exit the vehicle easily.
• The shift lever has been shifted to P.
• The engine switch has been turned
off.
• The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.
When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and steering
wheel automatically return to their original positions.
• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION
ON mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
■ Operation of the power easy access system
When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is
already close to the rearmost position, etc.
■ Customization
The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be customized. (Customizable features: P. 552)
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
127
Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel
and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button.
Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.
■ Recording procedure
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the
desired positions.
4
While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the
buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.
■ Recall procedure
1
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3
Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
1
128
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel
position recall).
■ Seat positions that can be memorized (P. 123)
The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be
memorized.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Recorded steering wheel position can be activated by pressing the engine switch.
■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the
same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
129
Memory recall function
Each electronic key (including a card key) can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or
more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3
Recall the driving position that you want to record.
4
While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock
switch (either lock or unlock) until
the buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered,
the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recall procedure
1
Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position,
and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart access system
with push-button start system or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering
wheel). However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle easier.
If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.
2
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode,
or fasten a seat belt.
The seat and steering wheel will move to the recorded position.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
1
130
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door. If 2 or
more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.
1
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2
While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the
driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart access system with
push-button start system, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the
driving position button which has been set.
■ Customization
The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
131
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
◆ Vertical adjustment
1
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
3
◆ Horizontal adjustment (if equipped)
The position of the head restraint
can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward
from the foremost position, it will return
to the rearmost position.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
Lock release button
132
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Rear seats
1
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button
■ Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock
release button.
If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making
the removal difficult, change the seat height or
angle.
Lock release button
■ Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.

Lock release button
Rear seats
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
133
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted
so that the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
3
134
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure

Power type
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:

1
Up
2
Down
3
Toward the driver
4
Away from the driver
Manual type
1
Hold the steering wheel and push
the lever down.
2
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to
secure the steering wheel.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
135
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or close to
the
mark.
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when (power type)
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (if equipped)
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory system. (P. 126)
■ Power easy access system (if equipped)
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 126)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and
resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is
not securely locked.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
engine switch mode.
136
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
Anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

Type A
Indicator
1
2
ON

Type B
Indicator
ON/OFF
OFF
When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
137
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do
not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
3
Operation of each component
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
138
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1
To select a mirror to adjust, press the
switch.
1
Left
2
Right
Pressing the same switch again will
put the switch in neutral.
2
To adjust the mirror, press the switch.
1
Up
2
Right
3
Down
4
Left
Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direction of
the vehicle’s rear.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
139
Linked mirror function when reversing (if equipped)
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear
view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in
order to give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, select neither “L” nor “R”.
■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing
With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to
the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 372)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (if equipped)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory. (P. 126)
■ Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P. 136)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
3
140
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
CAUTION
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
141
Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1
Closing
2
One-touch closing*
3
Opening
4
One-touch opening*
*: To stop the window partway, operate the
3
switch in the opposite direction.
Operation of each component
Window lock switch
Press the switch to lock the passenger
window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children from
accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
Indicator
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
142
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel
is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ If the power window does not operate normally
When operating the power window, if the power window stops and then operates in the
opposite direction, perform the following operations using the power window switch of
the relevant door:
With the vehicle stopped and the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds after the power window stops and operates in the opposite direction, pull and hold
the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. When the window is completely closed, release the switch.
If the power window still cannot be operated even though the above operations have
been carried out, perform the following initialization procedure.
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.
3 When the window is closed completely, release the power window switch. Pull and
hold the switch in the one-touch closing position again for approximately 4 seconds.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue
pressing the switch for 1 second after the window has opened completely.
5 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
pulling the switch for 1 second after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, perform the procedure again from
the beginning.
If, after performing the above procedure correctly, the power window cannot be operated normally, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
143
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.*
(P. 509)
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 105)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
power windows open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation
for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do
not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the window lock switch. (P. 141)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
window fully closes.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Operation of each component
CAUTION
3
144
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and
down.
Opening and closing
Opens the moon roof*
1
The moon roof stops slightly before the
fully open position to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open the
moon roof.
2
Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly
press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilting up and down
1
Tilts the moon roof up*
2
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly
press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
145
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either
front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 509)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 105)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
146
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
1 Stop the vehicle.
1
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it
will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down,
open and close.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
1 Stop the vehicle.
1
2 Press and hold the “UP” switch* until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position
and stops.
1
3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt
down, open and close.
4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
1
* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch,
and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt
down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
147
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
moon roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
CAUTION
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
Operation of each component
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is
moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts
caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
moon roof fully closes.
148
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
149
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle......................150
Cargo and luggage....................158
Vehicle load limits .........................161
Trailer towing................................. 162
Dinghy towing............................... 163
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ............ 164
Automatic transmission............ 169
Turn signal lever ........................... 175
Parking brake.................................177
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.......................... 178
Automatic High Beam ............... 181
Fog light switch.............................186
Windshield wipers and
washer........................................... 187
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap....... 194
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
4-5. Using the driving
support systems
Cruise control ..............................198
Dynamic radar cruise
control .........................................202
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert)..........217
Intuitive parking assist ..............223
Lexus parking
assist monitor............................230
Driving mode select
switch ........................................... 246
Driving assist systems............... 249
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)..........255
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor).............. 262
• The Blind Spot Monitor
function .................................... 265
• The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function..........................267
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ..................... 270
150
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Starting the engine
P. 164
Driving
1
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 169)
2
Release the parking brake. (P. 177)
3
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal
to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or
N. (P. 169)
Parking the vehicle
1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2
Set the parking brake. (P. 177)
3
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 169)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
4
Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
5
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
2
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3
Release the parking brake.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
151
■ When starting off on an uphill
The hill-start assist control will activate. (P. 249)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may
become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slip-
pery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and
brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due
to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is selected
■ Restraining the engine output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine
output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is
operating. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down
operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 537)
152
4-1. Before driving
■ Idling time before engine stop (IS200t)
To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately after highspeed driving or hill climbing.
Driving condition
Idling time
Normal city driving
Not necessary
High-speed driving (Constant speed of approx. 62 mph
[100 km/h])
Approximately
1 minute
Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 62 mph (100 km/h)
or more (race track driving, etc.)
Approximately
2 minutes
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
153
CAUTION
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This
prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only
slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using
your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving
will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems
will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over
and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way: P. 467
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep
hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 169)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear
view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive across a river or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the engine or
cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires.
Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle
are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
154
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your
ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed
could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the
brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly,
steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll
forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from
the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the
shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of
the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brakes only: Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front
braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake
discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also
have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those
of the brake discs are exceeded.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
155
CAUTION
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the shift lever is any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing
the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust
system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle
when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the
vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as
the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the
seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers
such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized
film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a
lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the
vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
156
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails,
the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more
firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is
stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
157
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as
this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the
same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging
the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
● IS200t only: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high speed driving or hill
climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger has cooled down.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 496)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have
your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
transfer (AWD models), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
158
4-1. Before driving
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P. 161)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not
designed for trailer towing.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
159
Calculation formula for your vehicle
1
Cargo capacity
2
Total load capacity (vehicle capacity
weight) (P. 524)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle,
which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on,
the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo
and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight
due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of
occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
*1: A =Weight of people
*2: B =Total load capacity
*3: C =Available cargo and luggage load
160
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the
driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing
an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.
● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind
the front seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• In front of the navigation system screen (if equipped) or Lexus Display Audio
screen (if equipped)
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration
of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
161
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 524)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated
average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
◆ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
4
◆ Cargo capacity
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 443)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability,
resulting in an accident.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the
number of occupants.
162
4-1. Before driving
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does
not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier
for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer
towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-1. Before driving
163
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.
NOTICE
4
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
164
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your
person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Check that the shift lever is in P.
3
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.
4
Press the engine switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for
up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any
engine switch mode.
Stopping the engine
1
Stop the vehicle.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Set the parking brake. (P. 177)
4
Press the engine switch.
5
Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the meters is off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
165
Changing engine switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake pedal released.
(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
1
The emergency flashers can be used.
The multi-information display will not be
displayed.
2
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the
meters.
3
IGNITION ON mode
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine
switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Check that “Turn Power OFF” is displayed on the multi-information display
and then press the engine switch once.
4
Check that “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display is off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on
the meters.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other than
P when turning off the engine, the
engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
166
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION ON
mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 103
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 118
■ Notes for the entry function
P. 119
■ If the engine does not start
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is
displaced out of P.
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 69)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel
will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is in P. Press the
engine switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, operation of the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case,
refrain from operating the engine switch. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock
motor will resume functioning.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
167
■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” is displayed on the multi-information dis-
play
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 450
■ Operation of the engine switch
● When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is
pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the engine switch mode may not
change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the
engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine switch off, please wait a
few seconds before restarting the engine.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated by a customized
setting
P. 509
CAUTION
4
■ When starting the engine
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until
the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold
the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 467)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning
the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and
brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
168
4-2. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long
periods of time without the engine running.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the meters while the engine is
not running, the engine switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the engine
switch off.
● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is
stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but
instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY
mode, battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the
switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
169
Automatic transmission
Shifting the shift lever
4
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever
with the brake pedal depressed.
170
4-2. Driving procedures
Shift position purpose
Shift position
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D
Normal driving*1
M
M mode driving*2 (P. 172)
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driving.
*2: Any gear range can be fixed when driving in M mode.
Selecting the driving mode
■ Sport mode/Eco drive mode
P. 246
■ Snow mode
Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery
road surfaces, such as snow.
Press the switch.
Press the switch again to return to
normal mode.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
171
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift switch.
When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be downshifted
to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions.
When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be one gear
upper than the gear in use during normal D position driving. Changing the shift
range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting
and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
1
Upshifting
2
Downshifting
8-speed models: The selected shift
range, from D1 to D8, will be displayed
in the meter.
6-speed models: The selected shift
range, from D1 to D6, will be displayed
in the meter.
To return to normal D position driving,
the “+” paddle shift switch must be held
down for a period of time.
4
Driving
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Meter display
D2 - D8
(8-speed models)
D2 - D6
(6-speed models)
D1
Function
A gear in the range between 1 and the selected gear is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving
conditions
1st gear is set
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
172
4-2. Driving procedures
Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to M. Gears can then be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of
your choice.
1
Upshifting
2
Downshifting
The gear changes once every time the
shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated.
8-speed models: The selected gear,
from M1 to M8, will be fixed and displayed in the meter.
6-speed models: The selected gear,
from M1 to M6, will be fixed and displayed in the meter.
When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situation:
● When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
● When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature is
low.
● When automatic transmission fluid temperature is high.
● When the needle of the tachometer is in the red zone (the range which
exceeds the allowable revs of the engine).
In the following situations, the gear will not shift even if the shift lever or paddle
shift switches are operated.
● “1st Gear not available due to slippery road surface” is displayed on the
multi information display.
● The vehicle speed is low (upshift only).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
173
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
● When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D
■ To protect the automatic transmission
“Transmission Fluid High Temperature” is displayed on the multi-information display and
a function is adopted that automatically selects a higher shift range when the fluid temperature is high. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Downshifting restriction warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes
be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the
shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned off after driving in
snow mode.
■ Gear position display on the multi-information display
When Gear positions is selected for a Drive Information screen on the multi-information
display and the shift lever is in the D or M position, the currently selected gear position
will be displayed on the multi-information display. (The display changes according to the
shift lever position and driving conditions.)
■ When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking,
engine braking will not activate because cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
will not be canceled.
● 8-speed models: While driving in the D position, downshifting to 7, 6, 5 or 4.
(P. 198, 202)
● 6-speed models: While driving in the D position, downshifting to 5 or 4.
(P. 198, 202)
● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position.
(P. 246)
174
4-2. Driving procedures
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 508
■ AI-SHIFT
● The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift lever
to the M position cancels the function.)
● 8-speed models: The G AI-SHIFT is automatically changed to a suitable gear step
while running in sport mode according to the driving operations and running conditions.
The G AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the drive mode select switch is set to
sport mode with the shift lever in the D position. (The function will be canceled, if the
drive mode is select switch is set to normal mode or shift lever is put in the M position.)
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle
skidding to the side or spinning.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
175
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
The lever will return to its original position after operation.
1
Right turn
2
Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3
Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4
Left turn
4
Driving
■ If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if you want
to stop them flashing
Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position 2 or 3 . If you
move the lever to either position 1 or 4 , the selected turn signals will flash.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
176
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
■ Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable feature P. 552)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-2. Driving procedures
177
Parking brake
Operating instructions
To set the parking brake, fully depress
the parking brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the brake pedal
with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again releases
the parking brake.)
U.S.A. Canada
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
P. 485
■ Usage in winter time
P. 271
178
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The side marker, tail, license
plate, instrument panel and
daytime running lights(P.
179) turn on.
1
2
The headlights, parking lights
and all lights listed (except
daytime running lights) above
turn on.
3
The headlights, parking lights,
daytime running lights (P.
179) and all the lights listed
above turn on and off automatically.
(When the engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.)
4
Off
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
The daytime running lights
turn on. (P. 179)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
U.S.A. Canada
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
179
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
2
Pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime
■ Automatic light off system
When the light switch is in
,
or
: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30
seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a
door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately
if
on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to
or
.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is left open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
running lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started with the headlight
switch off (for Canada) or in the
or “AUTO” position and the parking brake
released. (Illuminate brighter than the parking lights.) Daytime running lights are not
designed for use at night.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater
durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything that
blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
180
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode
and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
181
Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the
brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles, etc.,
and automatically turns the high beam on or off as necessary.
Activating the Automatic High Beam system
1
Push the lever away from you with
the headlight switch in the
or
position.
4
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
Driving
2
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
come on when the headlights are turned
on automatically to indicate that the system is active.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
182
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
When all of the following conditions are met, the high beam will be automatically
turned on (after approximately 1 second):
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
● There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail lights
turned on.
● There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
If any of the following conditions are met, the high beam will be automatically
turned off:
● Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned on.
● There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
Turning the high beam on/off manually
■ Switching to low beam
Pull the lever to the original position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.
■ Switching to high beam
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
183
■ The Automatic High Beam can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When oncoming or preceding vehicles are hidden from sight due to repeated
curves, road dividers or roadside trees
● High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without
using the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may
cause the high beam to turn off.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding
vehicles
• The movement and direction of oncoming and preceding vehicles
• When an oncoming or preceding vehicle only has operational lights on one side
• When an oncoming or preceding vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage
● High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.
● Small vehicles, such as bicycles, may not be detected.
● In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding
brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beams on or off manually rather than relying
on the Automatic High Beam system.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights that are either switched off, dirty, changing color, or have improperly adjusted aim.
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with
rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.
• The vehicle is listing or titling, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other
drivers or pedestrians nearby.
184
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
1 Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in
or
.
• The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.
• Automatic High Beam switch is on.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Within 5 seconds after 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original
position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 9 times, then leave the
lever in high beam position.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.
CAUTION
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
185
NOTICE
■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system
Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.
● Do not touch the camera sensor.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not spill liquid onto the camera sensor.
● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of wind-
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
shield near the camera sensor.
● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor will
mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehicles, etc.
● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the camera sensor.
● Do not overload the vehicle.
● Do not modify the vehicle.
● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
186
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as
in rain and fog.
1
2
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Turns the fog lights off
Turns the fog lights on
■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
187
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers. The lever will return to its
original position after operation.

Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
(U.S.A.) or
1
(Canada)
Up 2 levels
2
Up 1 level
3
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Down 1 level
4
(U.S.A.) or
4
(Canada)
Driving
Down 2 levels
Operation
or
Status
before
operation
or
or
Off
Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
Intermittent
operation
Off
Off
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation
Off
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
Off
Low speed
operation
No change
No change
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
188
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
5
Increases the intermittent windshield
wiper frequency
6
Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
The intermittent windshield wiper operates more frequently as vehicle speed
becomes higher.
7
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When
the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode and the headlights are on, if the
lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners
will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th
time the lever is pulled.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

189
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
(U.S.A.) or
1
(Canada)
Up 2 levels
2
Up 1 level
3
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Down 1 level
(U.S.A.) or
4
(Canada)
AUTO mode
indicator
Down 2 levels
AUTO mode on/off switch
5
Operation
or
Status
before
operation
or
or
Off
Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation
Off
Off
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
Off
Low speed
operation
No change
No change
Off
Temporary
operation*
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
AUTO
mode
Intermittent
operation
Continuously
No change
*: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
With AUTO mode selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor
detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with
rain volume and vehicle speed.
The AUTO mode indicator will turn on when AUTO mode is selected.
190
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning
the switch ring.
6
Increases the sensitivity
7
Decreases the sensitivity
8
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When
the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode and the headlights are on, if the
lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners
will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th
time the lever is pulled.
Switching between the intermittent windshield wipers and rain-sensing
windshield wipers (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate regardless of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops. The intermittent windshield wiper
operation can be switched when the vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off. The
wiper operation cannot be switched during AUTO mode or while the intermittent windshield wipers are operating.
Press and hold
until the AUTO
mode indicator stops flashing.
If
is pressed and held until the
AUTO mode indicator stops flashing
again, it will return to its previous state.
The wiper can be switched when the
vehicle is stopped and the wipers are off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
191
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Operation of the intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Move the lever up by 2 levels
1
Move the lever up by 1 level
2
3
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Move the lever down by 1 level
4
(U.S.A.) or
(Can-
ada)
Move the lever down by 2 levels
or
or
or
Off
Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
Intermittent
operation
Off
Off
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation
Off
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
Off
Low speed
operation
No change
No change
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Operation
Status
before
operation
192
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
5
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
6
Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
The intermittent windshield wiper
operates more frequently as vehicle
speed becomes higher.
7
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate
a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights
are on, if the lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate once.
After this, the headlight cleaners will
operate every 5th time the lever is
pulled.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After performing a washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one
more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, this final wiper operation will not be performed while driving.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode.
● Intermittent wiper interval
● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs)
With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched
from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
193
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or
setting of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the
windshield.
● If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F (-30°C)
or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any
mode other than AUTO mode.
■ When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation (vehicles with rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
AUTO mode cannot be activated even if
is pressed.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything
else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The
fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and
held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
4
194
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
P. 526
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal
surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity
before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors
to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the
sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel
may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come
close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-4. Refueling
195
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
196
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
With the doors unlocked, press the
center of the rear edge of the fuel
filler door.
Push until you hear a click and take your
hand away to slightly open the fuel filler
door. Then open the door fully by hand.
2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
remove it and put it into the holder
on the fuel filler door.
■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the
lever to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler
door cannot be opened by pressing the rear
edge of the fuel filler door.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-4. Refueling
197
Closing the fuel tank cap
1
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap
until you hear a click. Once the cap
is released, it will turn slightly in the
opposite direction.
2
Close the fuel filler door, and press
the center of the rear edge of the
fuel filler door until you hear a click.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler
door will also lock.
The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the following situations:
● When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle
● When the automatic door locking system is operated (P. 554)
● When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked
CAUTION
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing
so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
■ Fuel filler door lock condition
4
198
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Cruise control
Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1
Indicators
2
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
2
Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, and push the
lever down to set the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
199
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.
1
Increases the speed
2
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the
lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the
desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the
lever is released.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when
the brakes are applied.
2
Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 25
mph (40 km/h).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
1
4
200
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accel-
erating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new
speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information display
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button
again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after
being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
201
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● During emergency towing
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
202
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Summary of functions
Without accelerator pedal operation by the driver, in vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates and decelerates in accordance to the changes in speed of the preceding vehicle. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (P. 203)
● Constant speed control mode (P. 208)
1
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button
2
Display
3
Set speed
4
Indicators
5
Cruise control switch
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
203
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle
following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from
the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill
slopes.
4
Driving
1
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
2
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system
applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
3
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of
the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
4
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the set
speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
204
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come
on and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
2
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (above
approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator and set
speed will be displayed.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
205
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.
1
Increases the speed
2
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
In the constant speed control mode (P. 208), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the
lever is released.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.6 seconds the
lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.6 seconds the
lever is held
206
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1
Long
2
Medium
3
Short
Preceding
vehicle mark
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set
automatically to long mode when the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed.
2
Pushing the lever up resumes the
speed control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
Resuming is available when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 25
mph (40 km/h).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
207
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicleto-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle
speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal
208
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set
speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only
when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due
to dirt, etc.
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
2
Switch to constant speed control
mode.
(Push the lever forward and hold for
approximately one second.)
Cruise control indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode.
If the engine switch is turned off and then turned to IGNITION ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
Adjusting the speed setting: P. 199
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 199
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
209
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wipers are in AUTO
mode or the high speed wiper operation).
● When snow mode is set.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
210
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
1 Grille cover
2 Radar sensor
■ Operation guide display
When the dynamic radar cruise control switch is operated, a guidance display is shown
on the meters for a few seconds as to how to operate the dynamic radar cruise control
switch or distance switch. (P. 89)
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 486)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
211
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: BABFT0041A
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or
more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
IC: 2024B-FT0041A
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
212
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate,
adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles
ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining
the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle
traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it
is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary
for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is
absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not
there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision with
a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take
immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure
the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in
use.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
213
CAUTION
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclers, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from
detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● During emergency towing
214
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (P. 207) will not be activated, which may lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
215
CAUTION
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not func-
tion correctly
Operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal operation depending on the situation)
as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of
the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
4
● When the road curves or when the lanes are
Driving
narrow
Accelerate
● When steering wheel operation or your posi-
tion in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates
suddenly
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Accelerate Decelerate
216
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not detect correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may not work normally or
malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always
have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● If the radar sensor needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
217
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
Summary of function
While driving on a road that has lane markers, this system recognizes the lane
markers using a camera as a sensor to alert the driver when the vehicle deviates
from its lane.
If the system judges that the vehicle has deviated from its lane, it alerts the driver
using a buzzer and indications on the multi-information display.
Camera sensor
4
Driving
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
218
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Turning the LDA system on
Press the LDA switch to activate the
system.
The LDA indicator and lane lines will
come on.
Press the switch again to turn the LDA
system off.
The LDA system will remain on or off
even if the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
Operating conditions
● When the vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more
● When the lane width is more than approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m)
● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more than
approximately 328 ft. (100 m)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
219
Indication on the multi-information display
When the inside of both lane lines turn
white:
Indicates that both right and left lane
markers are recognized.
If the vehicle deviates from the lane, the
lane line on the side the vehicle has deviated from will flash in yellow. (P. 483)
When the inside of either lane line turns
white:
Indicates that the lane marker on the
white-marked side is recognized.
If the vehicle deviates from the side of a
lane with recognized lane markers, the
lane line will flash in yellow. (P. 483)
Indicates that no lane markers are recognized or the LDA system is temporarily canceled.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
When the inside of both lane lines are
black:
4
220
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Temporary cancelation of the LDA system functions
If any of the following occurs, the LDA system functions will be temporarily canceled. The
functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions have returned.
● The turn signal lever is operated.
● The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system functions.
● When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving.
● When the lane departure warning sounds.
The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds after it
has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again.
■ The lane departure warning
Depending on the audio system sound level or air conditioning fan noise while the audio
system or air conditioning system is in use, it may be difficult to hear the warning sound.
■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun
The LDA system may not be available and a warning message (P. 486) will be displayed for a while after driving has started. When the temperature in the cabin decreases
and the temperature around the camera sensor (P. 202) becomes suitable for its
operation, the functions will begin to operate.
■ If there are lane markers on only one side of the vehicle
The lane departure warning will not operate for the side on which lane markers could not
be recognized.
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may be unable to recognize lane markers
causing the lane departure warning function to operate incorrectly. However, this does
not indicate a malfunction.
● When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing or
before a ticket checkpoint
● When driving on a sharp curve
● When lane markers are extremely narrow or extremely wide
● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or improper
tire inflation pressure
● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely
short
● When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to recognize compared to white markers.)
● When the lane markers are broken, Botts’ dots (raised pavement markers) or stones
● When the lane markers are on a curb etc.
● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.
● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a shadow
covers the lane markers
● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete
● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light
● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the entrance to
or exit from a tunnel
● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the camera lens
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
221
● When driving on roads that are branching or merging
● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing water,
etc.
● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving on an
extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement
● When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when
the headlights are misaligned
● When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven
● When driving on rough or unpaved roads
■ When changing the tires
Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.
■ Warning messages for the LDA system
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of
the need for caution while driving. (P. 486)
CAUTION
■ Before using the LDA system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Do not rely solely on the LDA system. The LDA system does not drive the vehicle automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the driver
must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for
operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving safely.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.
■ To avoid operating the LDA by mistake
Switch the LDA system off using the LDA switch when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use the LDA system in any of the following situations.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● When driving with tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment
● When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinterpreted
as lane markers (such as guardrails, a curb, reflector posts, etc.)
● When driving on snowy roads
● When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, sand, dirt, etc.
● When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains of
old lane markers are still visible on the road
● When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving in a
temporary lane
222
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LDA system
● Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension.
If any suspension parts need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a grille
guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Camera sensor
Observe the following to ensure that the LDA system functions correctly.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation
or ice are adhering to the windshield.
● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the
windshield near the camera sensor.
● Do not spill liquid onto the camera sensor
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens.
● If the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up, use the wind-
shield defogger to remove the fog.
When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper part
of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images.
● Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass cleaner
etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.
The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disassemble
the camera sensor.
● If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
223
Intuitive parking assist
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via
the multi-information display, Lexus Display Audio screen (if equipped) and a
buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.
■ Types of sensors
4
Front center sensors
3
Rear corner sensors
2
Front corner sensors
4
Rear center sensors
Driving
1
■ Intuitive parking assist switch
Turns the intuitive parking assist on/
off
When on, the indicator light comes
on to inform the driver that the system is operational.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
224
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-information display and Lexus Display Audio screen (if equipped) depending on the
position and distance to the obstacle.
■ Multi-information display
1
Front corner sensor detection
2
Front center sensor detection
3
Rear corner sensor detection
4
Rear center sensor detection
■ Lexus Display Audio screen (if equipped)
A graphic is automatically displayed
when an obstacle is detected. The
screen can be set so that the graphic
is not displayed. (P. 227)
: Select to mute the buzzer
sounds.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
225
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
■ Multi-information display and Lexus Display Audio screen (if equipped)
Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.
Approximate distance to obstacle
Display
Front corner sensor/
front center sensor
Rear corner sensor/
rear center sensor
Front center sensor only:
Rear center sensor only:
3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(continuous)
4
1.6 ft. (50 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)
Driving
(continuous)
1.3 ft. (40 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(continuous)
Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(blinking* or
continuous*2)
1
*1: Multi-information display
*2: Lexus Display Audio screen
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Rear corner sensor:
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
Rear center sensor:
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
Rear corner sensor:
Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
Rear center sensor:
Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
226
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the
vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer
sounds continuously:
• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system
responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.
Detection range of the sensors
1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
2
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
3
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
4
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range
of the sensors. Note that the sensors
cannot detect obstacles that are
extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object
etc.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
227
Setting up intuitive parking assist
You can change the warning beep volume and Lexus Display Audio screen
operating conditions.
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. (P. 278)
2
Select “SETUP” on the “Menu” screen.
3
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
4
Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
5
Select the desired button.
1
The alert volume can be adjusted.
2
On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.
3
Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be
set.
● Front center sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Front corner sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
(At any speed when the shift lever is in R)
● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
4
228
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front corner
and rear bumpers.
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of
the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are
listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal
display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape,
signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance
may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s detection
areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached,
even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of the audio system or air flow
noise of the air conditioning system.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
229
■ If a message is displayed on the multi-information display
P. 484
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

CAUTION
■ When using the intuitive parking assist
NOTICE
■ When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no
obstacles are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
● If the bumper or grille collides with something.
● If the display shows continuously without beeping, except when the buzzer mute
switch has been turned on.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even when there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that
the sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly
cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or
reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
230
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus parking assist monitor
The parking assist monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of the view
behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may
differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
The rear view image is displayed when
the shift position is in R and the engine
switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The parking assist monitor system will
be deactivated when the shift position is
in any position other than R.
Using the Lexus parking assist monitor
■ Screen display
The parking assist monitor screen
will be displayed if the shift position is
shifted to R while the engine switch
is in IGNITION ON mode.
A
Intuitive parking assist display (if
equipped)
If an obstacle is detected while the
intuitive parking assist is on, a display
is shown in the top right corner of the
screen.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
231
■ Using the system
Use any of the following modes.
● Estimated course line display mode (P. 233)
Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the
steering wheel.
4
The steering wheel return points
(parking assist guide lines) are
displayed.
● Distance guide line display mode
Distance guide lines only are displayed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
● Parking assist guide line display mode (P. 235)
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Switching the display mode
When the shift position is in any position other than R, the display mode can be
changed in the following procedure.
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, and then
select “Setup” on the screen.
2
Select “Vehicle”, and then select “Back Camera Guide Line Setting” on the
screen.
3
Select the desired display mode.
1
Estimated course line display
mode (P. 233)
2
Parking assist guide line display
mode (P. 235)
3
Distance guide line display mode
Distance guide lines only are displayed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
233
Estimated course line display mode
■ Screen description
1
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
2
Vehicle width guide line
3
Estimated course lines
The lines show an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.
4
Distance guide line
The line moves, together with the estimated course lines, in sync with the steering
wheel. The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately
3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper.
5
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)
(blue) from the edge of the bumper.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
The line aligns with the estimated course lines when the steering wheel is straight.
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Parking operation
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space
described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1
Shift the shift position to R position.
2
Turn the steering wheel so that
the estimated course lines are
within the parking space, and
back up slowly.
3
1
Parking space
2
Estimated course lines
When the rear position of the
vehicle has entered the parking
space, turn the steering wheel so
that the vehicle width guide lines
are within the left and right dividing lines of the parking space.
3
4
Vehicle width guide line
Once the vehicle width guide lines and the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
5
235
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
Parking assist guide line display mode
■ Screen description
1
Vehicle width guide lines
These lines indicate a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight
up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Parking assist guide lines
These lines indicate the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.
These lines also indicate the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.
3
Distance guide line
This line (red) indicates points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind the rear
bumper of your vehicle.
4
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
2
4
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Parking operation
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space
described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1
Shift the shift position to R position.
2
Back up until the parking assist
guide line meets the edge of the
left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
1
Parking assist guide line
2
Parking space dividing line
3
Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and back up slowly.
4
Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the
parking space.
5
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
237
Lexus parking assist monitor precautions
■ Area displayed on screen
The parking assist monitor displays
an image of the view from the
bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.
The image on the rear view monitor
system screen can be adjusted.
(P. 291)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
• The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the
screen.
• The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears
on the screen differs from the actual
distance.
Corners of bumper
• Items which are located higher than
the camera may not be displayed on
the monitor.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a backlit license plate, it may interfere with the display.
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Lexus parking assist monitor camera
The camera for the parking assist
monitor is located above the license
plate.
● Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering
to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a
large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet
cloth.
■ Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be
parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to
be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear
to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of
the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on
the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
239
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehicle
than the actual distance. Because
of this, objects will appear to be
farther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the
guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.
4
The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guide lines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle sags
due to the number of passengers
or the distribution of the load,
there is a margin of error between
the guide lines on the screen and
the actual distance/course on the
road.
A margin of error
■ When approaching three-dimensional objects
The estimated course lines target a flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It
is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional object (such as
vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When
approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the
flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
● Estimated course lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
In the case shown in the illustration, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines
and the vehicle does not look as if
it will hits the truck. However, the
rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated
course lines. In reality if you back
up as guided by the estimated
course lines, the vehicle may hit
the truck.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
241
● Distance guide lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point 2 . However, in reality if you back up to
point 1 , you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that 1
is closest and 3 is farthest away.
However, in reality, the distance to
1 and 3 is the same and 2 is
farther than 1 and 3 .
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Things you should know
■ If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the
solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Likely cause
Solution
 The image is difficult to see
• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the lens is
either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to
the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights,
sodium lights, mercury lights etc.
If this happens due to these causes, it
does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor
again once conditions have been
improved.)
The image on the Lexus parking assist
monitor system screen can be adjusted.
(P. 291)
 The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water Flush the camera with a large quantity of
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to water and wipe the camera lens clean
the camera.
with a soft and wet cloth.
 The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
received a strong impact.
dealer.
 The guide lines are very far out of alignment
The camera position is out of alignment.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy
load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low
due to a tire puncture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an incline.
If this happens due to these causes, it
does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Likely cause
243
Solution
 The estimated course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight
There is a malfunction in the signals being Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
output by the steering sensor.
dealer.
 Guide lines are not displayed
The trunk is open.
Close the trunk.
If this does not resolve the symptom, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
 The estimated course lines are not displayed
• The steering wheel has been moved
while the battery was being reinstalled.
• Battery power is low.
• The steering sensor has been reinstalled.
• There is a malfunction in the signals
being output by the steering sensor.
Stop the vehicle, and turn the steering
wheel as far as it will go to the left and
right.
If this does not resolve the symptom, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ When using the Lexus parking assist monitor system
The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when
backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries.
● Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The image
and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual
state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,
depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
● The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to
be fully aware of this before using the parking assist system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the parking assist monitor in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency tires
• When the trunk is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The
image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the
image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around
the vehicle before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen
may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that
appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances.
(P. 238)
● Estimated course line display mode: If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle
width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
245
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may
change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operating.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water
and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause
the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to
the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or
camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction.
If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

Vehicles without Adaptive Variable Suspension System
Except
F SPORT
F SPORT models models
1
Normal mode
For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to Eco
drive mode or sport mode.
2
Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that
involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
left, the Eco drive mode indicator comes on.
3
Sport mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the transmission and steering.
Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for example when driving
on mountain roads.
When not in sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT” indicator comes on.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems

247
Vehicles with Adaptive Variable Suspension System
F SPORT
Except
F SPORT models models
1
Normal mode
For normal driving.
2
Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that
involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
left, the Eco drive mode indicator comes on.
3
Sport mode
• SPORT S mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the transmission and the
engine. Suitable for when powerful acceleration is desirable.
When not in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S” indicator comes on.
• SPORT S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the transmission. Suitable for sporty driving.
When in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S+” indicator comes on.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to Eco
drive mode or sport mode.
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (P. 368). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■ Sport mode automatic deactivation
Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned off after driving in
sport mode.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
249
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however,
that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too
heavily when operating the vehicle.
◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
◆ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.
◆ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ Hill-start assist control
Prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an incline or slippery slope
◆ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (if equipped)
Adjusts the front wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed
and steering wheel movement
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
4
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the
steering wheel
◆ Adaptive Variable Suspension system (if equipped)
By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for
each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system
combines riding comfort with superior steering stability, and helps good vehicle posture. (P. 247)
◆ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, EPS and VGRS (if equipped) systems
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes, engine output, steering assist, and if equipped with
VGRS, steering ratio
◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 255
◆ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
P. 262
When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash while
the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
251
Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC system may reduce
power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing
to turn the system off may
make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly
press and release
.
The “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display. Press
again to turn the system back on.
4
Driving
■ Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold
for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display.*
Press
again to turn the systems back on.
*: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision
braking will also be disabled. The pre-collision system warning light will come on and
the message will be shown on the multi-information display. (P. 255)
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC
has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ VGRS is disabled when
VGRS may stop operating in the following situations.
In this event, the steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but it will
return when the system restarts.
● When the steering wheel is operated for an extended period of time while the vehicle is
stopped or is moving very slowly
● When the steering wheel has been held fully to the left or right
The center position of the steering wheel may change when VGRS is disabled. However,
the position will return to normal after VGRS is reactivated.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected
automatically when driving.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist
control and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to
move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.
None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ EPS and VGRS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems
After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically reenabled in the following situations:
● When the engine switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed
increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur
when vehicle speed increases.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
253
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating
when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering
wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input
or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal
within 10 minutes.
■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:
● The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on
an upward incline).
● The vehicle is stopped.
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
● The parking brake is not engaged.
■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
● The shift lever is moved to P or N.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed.
● The parking brake is engaged.
● Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively
worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate
effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle
stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an
accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these
are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the
TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving
assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
255
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
When the radar sensor detects the possibility of a frontal collision, brakes are
automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.
The pre-collision system can be turned on and off as necessary by operating
the switch. (P. 256)
◆ Pre-collision warning
When a high possibility of a frontal
collision is detected, the pre-collision system warning light flashes, a
buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.
4
Driving
◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
The system may not warn the driver using a warning light, warning display and
buzzer when the system detects and judges braking operations.
◆ Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the
driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to
reduce the collision speed.
◆ Suspension control (vehicles with Adaptive Variable Suspension System)
When the system determines that there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the operation of Adaptive Variable Suspension System (P. 250) optimally controls the damping force of the shock absorber.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Disabling pre-collision system
1
Enabled
2
Disabled
The pre-collision system warning light
comes on when pre-collision system is
disabled.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehicles or
other obstacles on or near the road
ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
257
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
The pre-collision system is enabled and the following conditions are met:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running
ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• The VSC system is not disabled.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running
ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Pre-collision braking:
• The VSC system is not disabled.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running
ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
● Suspension control (vehicles with Adaptive Variable Suspension System):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running
ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of a collision
In any of the following situations where the frontal area of the radar sensor is interrupted,
the radar sensor may detect possibility of a frontal collision and the system may be activated.
● When passing by an oncoming vehicle in a curve or a turn to the right or the left.
● When rapidly approaching an obstacle ahead (e.g. preceding vehicle, toll gate barrier,
etc.)
● When there is a structural object (billboard, low ceiling, fluorescent light, etc.) above
the uphill road ahead
● When driving on a narrow road or through under a low overhead structure (bridge,
tunnel, fly-under, etc.)
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When there is a metal object, bump, or protrusion on the road surface
● When vehicle’s front part is raised or lowered depending on loading conditions
● When the direction of radar sensor is misaligned by strong impact applied on an area
around the radar sensor, etc.
● When there is an obstacle (guard rail, etc.) by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When the front of your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by putting a heavy load in
the trunk etc.)
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility
that the brakes may be applied with a force greater than normal.
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees,
or snowdrifts.
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● If the vehicle is skidding when VSC is not operating
● When your vehicle is steeply inclined
● When only part of your vehicle’s front end collides with, or contacts, a vehicle or object
in a frontal collision
● When the radar sensor moves off position due to its surrounding area being subjected
to a strong impact
● When an obstacle suddenly appears in front of the vehicle due to the steering wheel
being turned sharply or another cause
■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sensors
being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled.
In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system or if the system is temporarily unusable
The pre-collision system warning light will flash and warning messages will be displayed.
(P. 477, 486)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
259
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: BABFT0041A
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or
more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
IC: 2024B-FT0041A
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any
circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen damage or injuries in
all cases. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
This system has been designed to help avoid and reduce the impact of collisions.
However, the system operates differently depending on the situation (P. 257,
258). As a result, the same level of performance may not be expected in all cases.
Also, the pre-collision brakes may not operate if the driver is depressing the brake
pedal or turning the steering wheel, as the system will determine such conditions as
collision avoidance operations.
● As the pre-collision system is designed to assist the driver in safe driving, it may operate under sporty driving conditions, which may cause an accident. For this reason
under sporty driving conditions, it is recommended that this system be disabled by
using the PCS OFF switch.
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate or
malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always
have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● If the radar sensor needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
261
CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There are
limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind the
following important points.
● Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the vehicle,
and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available to
the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of the
vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to
determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system's braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision is
unavoidable. This system is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely without appropriate operations performed by the
driver. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must take
direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;
● The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes
● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.
1
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the
switch’s indicator illuminates and the buzzer sounds. Common switch for Blind Spot
Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
2
Outside rear view mirror indicators
Blind Spot Monitor function:
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator
comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view mirror
indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the
outside rear view mirror indicators flash.
3
Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
263
■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to
see.
■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high
audio volume.
■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (P. 486)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID : OAYSRR2A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law : Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands : 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Output power : less than 20 milliwatts
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle
rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
function correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on
the bumper clean at all times.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If
the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles
that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is
subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the
bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
265
The Blind Spot Monitor function
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are
traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear
view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via
the outside rear view mirror indicator.
The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
1
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from
the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of
the vehicle is not in the detection area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the
rear bumper
3
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward
of the rear bumper
CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver
that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor
function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s
own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
2
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when
● The BSM main switch is set to on
● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles
and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following con-
ditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection
area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road
etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from
your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed
as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
267
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can
detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses
radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing
the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
1
Approaching vehicles
2
Detection areas
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is
necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles etc. before backing up.
Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s
own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving
CAUTION
4
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster
vehicles from farther away.
Example:
Approaching vehicle
Speed
1 Approximate
Fast
18 mph (28 km/h)
65 ft. (20 m)
Slow
5 mph (8 km/h)
18 ft. (5.5 m)
alert distance
■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when
● The BSM main switch is set to on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28
km/h).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
269
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of
vehicles and/or objects.
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function cor-
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4
Driving
rectly
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
conditions:
● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
● When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
● When multiple vehicles approach continuously
● Shallow angle parking
● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
● When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.
● Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
● Directly after the engine is started with the BSM main switch on
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
because of obstacles
270
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for
the rear tires.*
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size
of the tires.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 18-inch tires.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any
snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on
the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the
vehicle.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle
ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-6. Driving tips
271
When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake.
The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary,
block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
Selecting tire chains

Except vehicles with 18-inch tires
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
1
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
2
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
4
Vehicles with 18-inch tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type
of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4
 1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Driving

272
4-6. Driving tips
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
● Do not use LKA (Lane Keeping Assist) system.
■ Driving with tire chains (except vehicles with 18-inch tires)
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30
mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations
that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains (except vehicles with 18-inch tires)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire
chains are fitted.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
4-6. Driving tips
273
4
Driving
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
274
Lexus Display
Audio system
5
5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio
System ..........................................276
Steering wheel audio
switches........................................ 281
Mobile Assistant.........................282
USB/AUX ports .........................284
5-2. Setup
Setup menu ..................................286
General settings......................... 287
Voice settings ..............................290
Display settings............................ 291
5-3. Using the audio system
Selecting the audio
source .......................................... 292
Optimal use of the audio
system .......................................... 293
Audio settings.............................. 294
Audio menu screen
operation .....................................297
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation......................... 300
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
275
Lexus Display
Audio system
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation................ 306
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod .................... 312
Listening USB memory
device............................................315
Using the AUX port...................319
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Steps for using Bluetooth®
devices........................................ 320
Registering a Bluetooth®
device...........................................322
Selecting a Bluetooth®
device...........................................323
Connecting a Bluetooth®
audio player...............................324
Connecting a Bluetooth®
phone ...........................................325
Displaying a Bluetooth®
device details ............................326
Detailed Bluetooth®
settings........................................327
5-8. Bluetooth® Audio
Listening to Bluetooth®
Audio............................................328
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using a Bluetooth®
Phone...........................................330
Making a call................................332
Receiving a call ...........................335
Speaking on the phone............336
Using a Bluetooth®
phone message........................338
Using the steering wheel
switches.......................................340
Bluetooth® phone
settings ......................................... 341
5-10. Phonebook
Contact settings .........................343
Messaging setting......................346
5-11. Bluetooth®
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).................... 347
Bluetooth® .................................... 351
5-12. Other function
“Information” screen.................356
USB photo ....................................358
Weather information ................360
Voice command system............361
LEXUS Enform Remote .........365
276
5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio System
Use the following buttons to start listening to the audio system.
Display Audio operation buttons
1
Eject a disc.
2
Seek up or down for a radio station, or to access a desired track or file.
3
Except radio and A/V mode: Pause or resume playing a track.
Radio and A/V mode: Turn mute on/off
4
Select a radio station band, track or file.
5
Disc slot
6
Display the media top screen.
7
Display the radio top screen.
8
Press to turn the audio system on/off, and turn to adjust the volume.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-1. Basic Operations
277
■ “Menu” screen
To display the “Menu” screen, press the
button on the controller unit.
Button
Function
Display the radio top screen (P. 300)
“Media”
Display the media top screen (P. 306, 312, 315, 319)
“Climate”
Automatic air conditioning system (P. 368)
“Phone”
Display the phone top screen (P. 330)
“Info”
Display the “Information” screen (P. 356)
“Setup”
Setup menu (P. 286)
“Display”
Display settings (P. 291)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
“Radio”
278
5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio controller
By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio system,
hands-free system, etc.
1
Display the “Source” screen or
audio top screen (P. 292)
2
Display the “Menu” screen
(P. 277)
3
Display the previous screen
4
Turn or move the controller to select
a function and number.
Move the controller to display the
left or right side of screen.
Push the controller to enter the selected function and number.
■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
1
Select: Turn or move the controller.
2
Enter: Push the controller.
■ Basic screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through the list.
1
Indicator turns on when you can
select the list by turning the controller.
2
Indicator turns on when you can
return to the previous screen by
pressing the back button.
3
Indicator turns on when you can
move the controller left to view
additional screen text.
4
Indicator turns on when you can move the controller right to view additional screen text.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-1. Basic Operations
279
Inputting letters and numbers
■ Input mode
Letters and numbers are inputted via the screen.
1
Turn the controller to select the
desired character and press the
controller to input the character.
2
When this indicator is shown, you
can change input fields by moving
the controller forward.
3
When this indicator is shown, you
can change character types by
moving the controller to the right
and then selecting the desired
character type.
4
Select to erase characters one by one. Select and hold to erase all characters.
5
Select to complete data input.
When in the input field you can move the cursor to the desired position.
1
Turn the controller to move the
cursor left or right.
2
When this indicator is shown, you
can move the cursor to the right
input field by moving the controller to the right.
3
When this indicator is shown, you
can move the cursor to the left
input field by moving the controller to the left.
4
When this indicator is shown, you can change to input mode by moving the
controller backward.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
■ Input field mode
5
280
5-1. Basic Operations
■ When using the screen
● Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react slowly.
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating
slightly slower than normal.
● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change
your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display” screen (P. 291) or remove
your sunglasses.
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temperatures
as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
■ Laser product
● USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
● THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
NOTICE
■ To prevent Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction
● Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food, liq-
uid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange
odor or stop functioning.
● Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or strong
impact as the controller may bend or break off.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-1. Basic Operations
281
Steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation
system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.
Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches
1
Volume switch
• Increases/decreases volume
• Press and hold: Continuously
increases/decreases volume
2
Radio mode:
• Press: Select a radio station
• Press and hold: Seek up/down
3
“MODE” switch
• Turns the power on, selects audio source
• Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation. To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
CD,
MP3/WMA/AAC
disc,
Bluetooth®, iPod or USB mode:
• Press: Select a track/file/video
• Press and hold: Fast up/down tracks/files/videos (MP3/WMA/AAC disc,
iPod or USB)
282
5-1. Basic Operations
Mobile Assistant
The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri Eyes Free mode via
the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible
cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via
Bluetooth. (P. 330)
1
Press and hold the off hook switch
until you hear the beeps that indicate
the system is listening.
2
The Mobile Assistant can be used
only when the neighboring screen is
displayed.
To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select
“Cancel”, or press and hold the off hook
switch.
To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the off hook
switch. Mobile Assistant can only be
restarted after the system responds to a
voice command. After some phone and
music commands, the Mobile Assistant
feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-1. Basic Operations
283
■ Adjusting the volume
The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knob or
steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized.
■ Microphone
It is not necessary to speak directly into the
microphone when using the Mobile Assistant.
● Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant.
● The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations:
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
• When spoken too quickly.
• When spoken at a low or high volume.
• When the roof or windows are open.
• When passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used.
• When the air conditioning system’s fan speed is set high.
• When the air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone.
■ Mobile Assistant precautions
● The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version installed on the
connected device.
● Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an unavailable
function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available.

● If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth , an error message
will be displayed on the screen.
● While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is
Bluetooth audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts.
284
5-1. Basic Operations
USB/AUX ports
Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the USB/
AUX port as indicated below. Select “iPod”, “USB”, “AUX” or “A/V” on the
audio source selection screen and the device can be operated via Display
Audio system.
Connecting using the USB/AUX port
■ iPod
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is
not turned on.
■ USB memory
Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.
Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
■ Portable audio player
Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-1. Basic Operations
285
Using a 4-pole AUX cable
To view a video on an iPod video or VTR, it is necessary to use a 4-pole AUX
cable to connect the portable audio device.
When connecting a portable audio device to the AUX port, use a 4-pole AUX
cable with a plug that matches the exact layout shown in the illustration.
1
Connected device (portable audio
device, etc.)
2
Left audio
3
Right audio
4
Ground
5
Video
When using an iPod video, a cable
that has a 4-pole AUX plug and a
USB connector is necessary. Connect the plug and connector to the
AUX and USB ports.
If a 4-pole AUX cable with a different layout is used, audio and/or video may not be output properly.
CAUTION
■ While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
■ When using a 4-pole AUX cable
5
286
5-2. Setup
Setup menu
The Display Audio system can be adjusted to the desired settings.
Display “Setup” screen
“Setup” screen:
“Setup”
1
Change the settings for operation
sounds, screen animation, etc.
(P. 287)
2
Adjust the settings for voice guidance volume and voice recognition
prompts. (P. 290)
3
Change the settings for registering,
removing, connecting and disconnecting Bluetooth® devices.
(P. 321)
4
Change the settings for FM radio, iPod, etc. (P. 294)
5
Change the settings for vehicle customization. (P. 552)
6
Change the settings for phone sound, phonebook, etc. (P. 341)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-2. Setup
287
General settings
Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen animation,
etc.
Screen for general settings
“General Settings” screen:
1
“Setup” “General”
Change language.
The selectable languages may differ
depending on the model or region.
2
Set the beep sound on/off.
3
Change the button color.
4
Change the startup image and
screen off image. (P. 288)
5
Set the animation effect on/off.
6
Delete personal data (P. 289)
7
Update program versions.
8
Update gracenote database versions.
For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
9
Display the open source license.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
5
288
5-2. Setup
Customizing images
 “Setup”  “General”  “Customize
1
Go to “Customize Images”:
Images”
2
Select “Set Images” and then select the desired image.
1
Set as startup image.
2
Set as screen off image.
3
Set as startup image and screen
off image.
■ Adding an image
1
Connect a USB memory device. (P. 284)
2
Select “Copy from USB” on the “Customize Images” screen and then
select the desired image.
3
Move the controller to the left and then select “Copy”.
Up to 10 images can be downloaded.
■ Deleting images
Select “Delete Images” on the “Customize Images” screen and then select the
desired images.
■ USB memory
When saving the images to a USB memory device, name the folder that the images are
saved to “Image”.
● Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
• The image’s file format must be JPEG
• USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
● JPEG file compatibility
Compatible image size: Maximum 5MB
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-2. Setup
289
NOTICE
■ If the console box lid cannot be fully closed
P. 318
■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
P. 318
Deleting personal data
 “Setup”  “General”  “Delete Personal Data”
1
2
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.
The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.
Phonebook data
Call history data
Favorite data
Bluetooth® devices data
Phone sound settings
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
Audio/video setting
Preset switch data
Last used radio station
Customized image data
FM info setting
iPod tagging information
Software update history
Software update detail information
Phone display setting
Contact/call history setting
Messaging setting
Traffic information map
Weather information
Phonebook data for voice recognition
Music data for voice recognition
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
290
5-2. Setup
Voice settings
This screen is used for guidance for voice command systems setting.
Go to “Voice Settings”:
 “Setup”  “Voice”
1
Adjust the voice guidance volume
setting.
2
Set the voice recognition prompts
on/off.
■ Return to the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Default”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-2. Setup
291
Display settings
Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of the screen.
The display can also be turned off.
Screen for display settings
Go to “Display”:
 “Display”
1
Turn off screen.
2
Adjust screen quality.
3
Adjust screen quality of the rear
view monitor camera.
4
Change to day mode.
Screen off
or
If a screen off image has been set, the set image will be displayed.
Day mode
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day Mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until “Day Mode”
is selected again.
Adjusting the screen quality
1
Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display” screen or select “Display” on
each audio menu screen. (P. 297)
2
Adjust the display as desired by turning the controller clockwise (+) or counterclockwise (-).
To select “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Color” or “Tone”, move the controller to the left.
(when “Display” is selected, “Color” and “Tone” are available.)
■ Changing the sample image (when “General” is selected)
Move the controller to the right and select the desired sample image.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
This setting turns the screen off. To turn it on, press any button such as
.
5
292
5-3. Using the audio system
Selecting the audio source
Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are explained in this
section.
Changing audio source
1
Press the
button to display the “Source” screen.
If the “Source” screen is not displayed, press the
2
button again.
Select the desired audio source.
The audio source can be selected by pressing the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button.
Using the steering wheel switches to change audio sources
Press the “MODE” switch when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes each time the “MODE” switch is pressed.
■ Rearranging the list
The listing order of the source list can be rearranged.
Move the controller to the left while on the “Source” screen.
2 Select “Audio Source Select”.
3 Select an item you wish to move and then select where to move the item to.
1
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-3. Using the audio system
293
Optimal use of the audio system
On the “Sound Settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/Bass), volume
balance and DSP settings can be adjusted.
How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality
1
Display audio menu screen. (P. 297)
2
Select “Sound Settings”.
To change between the sound setting screen and DSP setting screen, move the
controller to the right then select the desired screen.

3
Adjust the treble, mid or
bass.
1
2
4
Adjust the front/rear audio balance.
5
Adjust the left/right audio balance.
“DSP”
1
Set the automatic sound levelizer
(ASL) on/off
2
Set the surround function on/off
■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.
■ About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system

“Sound”
294
5-3. Using the audio system
Audio settings
Screen for audio settings
Go to “Audio Settings”:
 “Setup”  “Audio”
1
Change radio settings (P. 294)
2
Change iPod settings (P. 295)
3
Change A/V settings (P. 295)
4
Change the cover art settings
(P. 296)
5
Change USB settings (P. 296)
Changing radio settings
To change radio settings, select “Radio Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen
or radio menu screen. (P. 297)
1
Set the displaying RBDS text message on/off
2
Change the number of radio presets
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-3. Using the audio system
295
Changing iPod settings
To change iPod settings, select “iPod Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen or
iPod menu screen. (P. 297)
1
Change the screen size (video
mode)
2
Change the cover art settings
(P. 296)
3
Adjust the screen quality (video
mode) (P. 291)
4
Change video sound input port
Changing A/V settings
To change A/V settings, select “External Video Settings” on the “Audio Settings”
screen or A/V menu screen. (P. 297)
Change the screen size
2
Change the video signal
3
Adjust the screen quality (video
mode) (P. 291)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
1
296
5-3. Using the audio system
Changing the cover art settings
To change the cover art settings, select “Cover Art Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen, CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc menu screen. (P. 297)
1
Select to set the cover art display of
the DISC mode on/off.
2
Select to set the cover art display of
the USB mode on/off.
3
Change the priority of the
Gracenote database of the USB
mode.
4
Select to set the cover art display of
the iPod mode on/off.
5
Change the priority of the Gracenote database of the iPod mode.
Changing USB settings
To change USB settings, select “USB Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen or
USB menu screen. (P. 297)
1
Change the cover art settings
(P. 296)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-3. Using the audio system
297
Audio menu screen operation
You can change the settings and control functions for each audio source.
Audio menu screen
To display the audio menu screen, move the controller to the left while on an
audio top screen.

AM, FM radio or XM Satellite Radio
1
Scan for receivable stations (AM,
FM radio)
2
Seek a station of the nearest frequency (stops when a station is
found) (AM, FM radio)
3
Captures the song title and artist
name information for potential
purchase (when the “HD)” indicator on the selected station is
appears) (FM radio)
Changes the channel of HD
Radio (HD2, HD3, HD4 where
applicable) (FM radio)
5
Seek a station of the traffic announcement (FM radio)
6
Turn HD Radio on/off (AM, FM radio)
7
Change radio settings (P. 294)
8
Change sound settings (P. 293)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
4
5
298


5-3. Using the audio system
CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, iPod, USB or Bluetooth®
1
Play or pause a track/file
2
Select a track/file
3
Select a folder/album (MP3/
WMA/AAC disc or USB)
4
Select and hold: Fast-forward or
reverse a track/file
5
Select a repeat mode. (P. 299)
6
Select a random/shuffle play
mode. (P. 299)
7
Select a full screen mode (iPod
video mode)
8
Change iPod settings (iPod)
(P. 295)
9
Change USB settings (USB)
(P. 296)
10
Connect a Bluetooth device (Bluetooth®) (P. 323)
11
Change the cover art settings (CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc) (P. 296)
12
Change sound settings (P. 293)
A/V
1
Select full screen mode
2
Change A/V settings (P. 295)
3
Change sound settings
(P. 293)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-3. Using the audio system
299
Repeat play
Mode
Action
Target audio source
File/track repeat
All media
Folder repeat
MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB
Album repeat
USB, Bluetooth®
Random/shuffle playback
Mode
Action
Target audio source
Random/shuffle play of the disc/ All media
folder/album
Random play of all folders
MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB
Random/shuffle play of all albums
iPod, USB, Bluetooth®
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
300
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation
Select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT” on the audio source selection screen to begin listening to the radio.
Radio top screen
Pressing the “RADIO” button displays the radio top screen from any screen of
the selected source.
■ Menu screen
P. 297
Selecting a station (AM or FM radio)
Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.
■ Seek tuning
Press and hold then release “” or “”.
The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency
and will stop when a station is found.
■ Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob.
■ Preset stations
Select the desired preset station by pressing “” or “” or controller.
■ Station list
1
Move the controller to the right and selecting “Station List”.
2
AM radio: Selecting a desired station.
FM radio: Selecting a desired type of station and selecting a desired station.
To refreshing the station list, select “Refresh”. Select “Source” on the refresh
screen, can be change to the other audio source while refreshing.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-4. Using the radio
301
Selecting an HD Radio channel
When “HD Radio” is set to “On”, available stations with HD Radio channels are
marked with “HD)”.
1
In AM or FM mode, select a station marked with “HD)”.
2
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select an HD Radio channel.
HD Radio channels can also be selected by selecting “Multicast” on the menu screen.
(P. 297)
Selecting a channel (XM Satellite Radio)
Select in to the desired channel using one of the following methods.
■ Turning up/down the channel
Press and hold “” or “” or turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob.
■ Preset channels
Select the desired preset channel by pressing “” or “” or controller.
■ Channel list
1
Move the controller to the right and selecting “Select a SAT Category”.
2
Selecting a desired category of channel and selecting a desired channel.
1
Search for desired stations or channel.
2
Select and hold one of the preset until you hear a beep.
Display the text message
■ Display the song information
Move the controller to the right and selecting “Text”.
■ Display the Additional information (AM, FM radio)
Move the controller to the right and selecting “Additional Information”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
Setting presets
5
302
5-4. Using the radio
HD Radio™ Technology
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives.
Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital
broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to
www.hdradio.com.
“HD Radio features included in Lexus radios:
Digital Sound - HD Radio broadcasts deliver crystal-clear, digital audio quality to
listeners.
HD2/HD3 Channels - FM stations can provide additional digital only audio programming with expanded content and format choices on HD2/HD3 channels.
PSD - Program Service Data (PSD) gives you on-screen information such as artist name and song title.
iTunes® Tagging - Listeners can tag (store) songs they like for later review and
purchase through iTunes.
Artist Experience® - Images related to the broadcast are displayed on the radio
screen, such as album cover art and station logos.”
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
■ HD Radio™ Technology troubleshooting guide
Experience
Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.
Cause
Action
The radio stations analog None, radio broadcast
and digital volume are not issue. A user can contact
properly aligned or the stathe radio station.
tion is in ballgame mode.
Reception issue, may
clear-up as the vehicle
Sound fades, blending in Radio is shifting between continues to be driven. Set
“HD Radio” to off, can
and out.
analog and digital audio.
force radio in an analog
audio.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-4. Using the radio
Experience
Cause
303
Action
This is normal behavior,
Audio mute condition
The radio does not have wait until the digital signal
when an HD2/HD3 multiaccess to digital signals at returns. If out of the covercast channel had been
age area, seek a new stathe moment.
playing.
tion.
The digital multicast content is not available until
Audio mute delay when
This is normal behavior,
HD Radio™ broadcast can
selecting an HD2/HD3 be decoded and make the wait for the audio to
multicast channel preset.
audio available. This takes become available.
up to 7 seconds.
Broadcaster should be
notified. Complete the
Text information does not Data service issue at the form: www.ibiquity.com/
match the present song
radio broadcaster.
automotive/
audio.
report_radio_station_
experiences.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually chang-
ing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such
as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception,
do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire
mounted inside the rear window.
■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions
● Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of
listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to XM on satellite
radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is
available online at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada).
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text
Information of XM Satellite Radio.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
Broadcaster should be
notified. Complete the
No text information shown Data service issue by the form: www.ibiquity.com/
for the present selected radio broadcaster.
automotive/
frequency.
report_radio_station_
experiences.
304
5-4. Using the radio
■ XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions
For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions
are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or
www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription
after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
 U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987
 Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM service or reporting a problem. If
“Ch000” is selected using the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no
longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and
the specific radio code.
■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings
● Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.)
or www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United
States and Canada.
Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated
with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
 U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987
 Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or
otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software
included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent
rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-4. Using the radio
305
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer to the
table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
SAT Check Antenna
SAT Ch Unauthorized
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM
antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding
antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is
being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM
Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “Ch000” and all free-toair channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “Ch001”. If it does not change automatically,
select another channel. To listen to the premium channel,
contact XM Satellite Radio.
SAT No Signal
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until
your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
SAT Loading
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait
until the unit has received the information.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action is required.
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for
SAT Chan Unavail- about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous
able
channel or “Ch001”. If it does not change automatically,
select another channel.
Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-4389677 (Canada).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programSAT Channel Off Air ming. Select another channel.
5
306
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation
Insert a disc, press the “MEDIA” button or select “DISC” on the “Source”
screen with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.
CD top screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the CD top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
■ Menu screen
P. 297
■ Selecting a track/file
Press the “” or “” button or turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the
desired track/file number.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
■ Selecting the track by the list (CD)
Move the controller to the right and then select the desired track.
■ Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA/AAC disc)
1
Move the controller to the right and then select “Folders”.
2
Select the desired folder. Then select a file to begin using the selected
folder.
■ Selecting a file by the selected folder (MP3/WMA/AAC disc)
1
Move the controller to the right and then select “Files”.
2
Select the desired file.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
307
■ Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the appropriate
measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Message
Cause
Correction procedures
“Check disc”
• The disc is dirty or damaged.
• Clean the disc.
• The disc is inserted • Insert the disc correctly.
upside down.
• Confirm the disc is play• The disc is not playable
able with the player.
with the player.
“DISC Error”
There is a malfunction Eject the disc.
within the system.
“No music files found.”
No playable data
included on the disc.
is
Eject the disc.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to
scratches, dirt or deterioration.
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is
detected.
■ If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
5
308
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Window Media Audio Standard)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
● AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or
marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
309
● File names
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with
the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist
name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number
of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3, WMA and AAC playback
When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are
first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is
played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any
files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data cannot be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA
and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and
AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on
the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA
and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some
cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
310
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
■ The Gracenote® media database
● Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID,
Playlist Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the United States
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
311
NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.
● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).
5
● Low-quality or deformed discs.
● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the
label peeled off.
■ Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player
itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
312
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button or select “iPod” on the audio source selection
screen.
Connecting an iPod
P. 284
iPod top screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the iPod top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
■ Menu screen
P. 297
■ Selecting a song
Press the “” or “” button or turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the
desired song number.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
■ Selecting a play mode
1
Move the controller to the right and then select “Browse”.
2
Select the desired play mode, and then select a song to begin using the
selected play mode.
■ Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and then select “Now Playing List”.
■ About iPod
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-6. Using an external device
313
● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been
Message
“Connection error.”
Cause/Correction procedures
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“There are no songs available
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
for playback.”
“No items available.”
This indicates that songs are not found in a selected
playlist.
“Please check the iPod firm- This indicates that the software version is not compatible.
ware version.”
Please check the compatible models. (P. 314)
“iPod authorization failed.”
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
This indicates that the display audio system failed to
authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
5
Lexus Display Audio system
designed to connect specifically to an iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone
may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod cover art
● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
● This function can be changed to on/off. (P. 296)
● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the
cover art display is in process.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will
resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be
available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
● Depending on the iPod, while connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated
with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system
instead.
● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the
iPod before use.
● Compatible models (P. 314)
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from
the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer
to your iPod Owner's Manual.
■ Error messages
314
5-6. Using an external device
■ Compatible models
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can
be used with this system.
● Made for
• iPod touch (5th generation)
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (7th generation)
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 5
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
NOTICE
■ If the console box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid as this may damage the iPod or the terminals, etc.
■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals
● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-6. Using an external device
315
Listening USB memory device
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Select “USB1” or “USB2” on the audio source selection screen.
Connecting a USB memory device
P. 284
USB top screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the USB top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
■ Menu screen
P. 297
■ Selecting a file
Press the “” or “” button or turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the
desired file number.
■ Selecting a play mode
1
Move the controller to the right and select “Browse”.
2
Select the desired play mode, then select a file to begin the selected play
mode.
■ Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and select “Now Playing List”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the “” or “” button.
5
316
5-6. Using an external device
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is
inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system
specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
reconnected, format the device.
■ Error messages for USB memory
Message
“Connection error.”
Cause/Correction procedures
This indicates a problem with the USB memory
device or its connection.
“There are no files available for This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
playback.”
included on the USB memory device.
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory devices that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.
● Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
• USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those
listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-6. Using an external device
317
● MP3, WMA and AAC files
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format
compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Window Media Audio Standard)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
● AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with
the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
● ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist
name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number
of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and
artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
318
5-6. Using an external device
● MP3, WMA and AAC playback
• When a device containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3,
WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the contents have not
been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in
which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA
and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA
and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some
cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
NOTICE
■ If the console box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory device that is connected to the
system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid
as this may damage the USB memory device or the terminals, etc.
■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
● Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory device.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device
while it is connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-6. Using an external device
319
Using the AUX port
To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the “MEDIA” button or
select “AUX” or “A/V” on the “Source” screen.
Connecting a portable player
P. 284
Top screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the top screen from any screen of the
selected source.
■ Menu screen
P. 297
■ Operating portable players connected to the audio system
NOTICE
■ If the console box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the portable player that is connected to the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid as
this may damage the portable audio player or the terminals, etc.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
Volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be
made on the portable player itself.
■ When using a portable player connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable player.
320
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Steps for using Bluetooth® devices
The following can be performed using Bluetooth® wireless communication:
■ A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via the Display
Audio system
■ Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone
In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a Bluetooth®
device by performing the following procedures.
Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth® device to be used with Lexus Display
Audio system (P. 322)
2. Select the Bluetooth® device to be used
(P. 323)
Audio
Hands-free phone
3. Start Bluetooth® connection (P. 324)
3. Start Bluetooth® connection (P. 325)
4. Check connection status
(P. 328)
4. Check connection status
(P. 331)
5. Use Bluetooth® audio
(P. 328)
5. Use Bluetooth® phone
(P. 332)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
321
“Bluetooth* Setup” screen
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■ When displaying “Bluetooth* Setup” screen from the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen
Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. (P. 292)
2 Move the controller to the left and select “Connect”.
■ When displaying “Bluetooth* Setup” screen from the phone top screen
1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 330)
2 Move the controller to the left and select “Connect Phone”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
1
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
322
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Registering a Bluetooth® device
Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players (AVP) can
be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5 Bluetooth® devices.
How to register a Bluetooth® device
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your device set to on.
2 Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
1
3
Move the controller to the left and then select “Add Device”
4
When this screen is displayed, input
the passcode displayed on the
screen into your Bluetooth® device.
For operation of the Bluetooth® device,
see the manual that comes with your
Bluetooth® device.
5
Register the Bluetooth® device
using your Bluetooth® device.
A PIN code are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the
device, you may need to select Yes to
register, or No to cancel on the device.
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Removing a Bluetooth® device
1
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
2
Move the controller to the left and then select “Remove Device”.
3
Select the device to remove.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
323
Selecting a Bluetooth® device
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below to
select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device at a
time.
How to select a Bluetooth® device
1
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
2
Select the device to connect.
3
Select “Connect All”, “Connect as a Phone” or “Connect as an Audio Player”.
If the desired Bluetooth® device is not displayed, register the device.
(P. 322)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
324
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player
There are 2 portable audio player connection settings available: connecting
from the vehicle and connecting from the portable player.
Connecting method is set to “Vehicle”
When the portable audio player is in standby for a connection, it will be automatically connected whenever the engine switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Connecting method is set to “Device”
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio system.
1
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
2
Select the device to connect.
3
Select “Connect All” or “Connect as an Audio player”.
If the desired Bluetooth® device is not displayed, register the device.
(P. 322)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
325
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone
There are two connecting methods available: automatic and manual.
Auto connection
When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always set it to
this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where a connection can be
established.
When the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,
the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.
Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent phone that was
connected. The connected result is displayed.
Manual connection
When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, you must
connect the Bluetooth® device manually.
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
2
Select the device to connect.
3
Select “Connect All”, “Connect as a Phone” or “Connect as an Audio player”.
If the desired Bluetooth® device is not displayed, register the device.
(P. 322)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■ Reconnecting a Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, the connection must be made manually, or the phone must be reselected.
■ Connecting a phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
● Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
● It may take time to connect.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
1
326
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Displaying a Bluetooth® device details
You can confirm and change the registered device details.
Bluetooth® device registration status
1
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
2
Select the desired device and then select “Device Info”.
1
Change the name of the device
2
Change the connection method
“Vehicle”: Connect the audio system
to the portable audio player.
“Device”: Connect the portable
audio player to the audio system
3
Device address
4
Device telephone number
Depending on the model of phone, the number may not be displayed.
5
Compatibility profile of the device
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■ Restoring the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Default” on the “Device Information” screen.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
327
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings.
How to check and change detailed Bluetooth® settings
1
Go to “Bluetooth* Setup”:
 “Setup”  “Bluetooth*”
2
Move the controller to the left and then select “System Settings”.
1
Select to set the Bluetooth® function on/off.
2
Change the name of the device.
3
Change the PIN-code.
You can change the PIN-code that is
used to register your Bluetooth®
devices in the system.
4
Device address
5
Select to set the display of the
telephone status on/off
6
Select to set the display of the audio player status on/off
You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting an
audio player.
7
Compatibility profile of the system
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■ Restoring the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Default” on the “System Settings” screen.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting a telephone.
5
328
5-8. Bluetooth® Audio
Listening to Bluetooth® Audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables the user to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
When a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection status
on the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. If the device is not connected, either register
or reconnect the device. (P. 323, 324)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Status display
You can check indicators, such as, signal strength and battery charge on the
screen.
1
Connection status
2
Battery charge
Depending on the type of portable
audio player used, some titles may not
be displayed.
Indicators
Connection status
Battery charge
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Conditions
Good
Full
Not connected
Empty
5-8. Bluetooth® Audio
329
Bluetooth® audio top screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button displays the Bluetooth® audio top screen from any
screen of the selected source.
■ Menu screen
P. 297
■ Selecting a song
Press the “” or “” button or turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the
desired song number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “” or “” button.
■ Selecting a play mode
1
Move the controller to the right and then select “Browse”.
2
Select the desired play mode, and then select a song to begin using the
selected play mode.
■ Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and then select “Now Playing List”.
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
330
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using a Bluetooth® Phone
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone
without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that
allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and
make/receive calls.
Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call
area and signal strength. (P. 331)
If a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection status. If the
device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. (P. 323, 325)
Phone top screen
To display the screen shown below, press the
select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.
1
Phone name
2
Bluetooth® connection status
(P. 331)
3
Display the call history screen
(P. 334)
4
Display the favorites screen
(P. 334)
5
Display the contacts screen
(P. 332)
6
Display the dial pad screen (P. 332)
7
Display the message inbox screen (P. 338)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
switch on the steering wheel or
331
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
◆ Telephone switch (P. 340)
◆ Microphone
The vehicle’s built-in microphone is
used when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can be
heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in the
system. (P. 322)
Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on any
screen.
Connection status
2
Signal strength
3
Battery charge
5
Indicators
Connection status
Battery charge
Signal strength
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Conditions
Good
Poor
Full
Empty
Excellent
Poor
Lexus Display Audio system
1
332
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Making a call
Once a Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure:
Dialing
 “Phone”  “Dial Pad”
1
Go to “Dial Pad”:
2
Input a phone number. (P. 279)
3
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.
Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your cellular
phone. The system has one phonebook for each registered telephone. Up to
2500 contacts may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 333)
 “Phone”  “Contacts”
1
Go to “Contacts”:
2
Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
3
Choose the number and then press the
press the controller.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
switch on the steering wheel or
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
333
When the phonebook is empty
You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth® phone to the system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If the cellular phone does not
support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer
contacts.
1
Press the
switch on the steering wheel.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.

2
For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone and “Automatic Transfer” is off
To transfer new contacts from a cellular phone, select “Always” and then
enable “Automatic Transfer”.
(P. 343)
Select “Once” if you want to transfer
new contacts from a cellular phone.
5

Select “Transfer” and operate your
cellular phone to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone.
Select “Add” if you want to add a new
contact manually.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
2
For a PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth® phone
334
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Dialing from favorites
You can make a call using numbers registered in the favorites.
 “Phone”  “Favorites”
1
Go to “Favorites”:
2
Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
3
Choose the number and then press the
press the controller.
switch on the steering wheel or
Dialing from history
You can make a call using the call history.
 “Phone”  “Call History”
1
Go to “Call History”:
2
Select the desired entry from the list.
3
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.
■ Call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phonebook, the
name is displayed in the call history.
● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the
call history.
■ International calls
Depending on the mobile phone in use, you may not be able to make international calls.
■ Calling by using the latest call history entry
1
2
3
Press the
Press the
Press the
switch on the steering wheel to display the phone top screen.
switch on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.
switch on the steering wheel to select the latest call history entry.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
335
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
To answer the phone
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel or select
.
To refuse a call
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.
Depending on the cellular phone in use, received international calls may not be displayed correctly.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
■ International calls
5
336
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
To adjust the call volume
Select “Transmit Volume”. To restore default volume, move the controller to the
left on the “Transmit Volume” screen and then select “Default”.
To adjust in call volume
Move the controller to the left and then select “In-call Volume”. You can also
adjust the volume using the steering switches or volume knob.
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.
Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can
store phone numbers and code numbers in the contacts using “p” or “w” symbols
(eg. 056133 w 0123p#1).


Contact including a phone number only
1
Move the controller to the left and then select “0-9”.
2
Input the number.
Phone number containing a “p” symbol
When the “p” symbol is dialed in an outgoing call, there will be a pause for 2
seconds before the following digits are dialed automatically.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
337
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

Phone number containing a “w” symbol
When the “w” symbol is dialed in an outgoing call, you need to go to the
“Release Tones” screen to dial the following digits. Move the controller to the
left and then select “Release Tones”.
To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call
or vice versa.
To hang up
Press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
.
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel or select
.
5
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel or select
.
Every time you press the
switch on the steering wheel or select
waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
during call
■ Transferring calls
● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the cellular phone while driving.
● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be dis-
played, and you can operate the system using the screen.
● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.
● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone's manual.
■ Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular
phone.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
To refuse the call:
338
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using a Bluetooth® phone message
Once a MAP-profile compatible Bluetooth phone is registered, you can
check the E-mail/SMS/MMS and reply to a message using the following procedures:
Checking messages
1
Go to message screen:
2
Select a message.
 “Phone”  “Messages”
Moving the controller to the left while on the message screen displays the setting
screen. (P. 346)
Move the controller to the right while on the message screen and then select an
account to display a message list for the selected account.
Message screen
Selecting “Next” or “Previous” displays the next or previous message.
If a message is too long, select “Read More” to display the full text.
■ Option menu
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen.
1
Select a prepared message and
send a return message.
2
Call a sender.
If more than one phone number is
registered for a sender, a phone
number selection screen will be displayed.
3
Call a phone number written in a message.
4
Select “Play” to have a message read out loud.
Select “Stop” to stop this function.
5
Select “Mark Unread” to mark mail that has been read as unread. Select
“Mark Read” to mark mail that has not been read as read.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
339
Replying to a message
1
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen.
2
Select “Quick Message” to display the “Quick Message” screen.
3
Select the desired message and then select “Send”.
■ Editing a quick message
1
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen.
2
Select “Quick Message” and then the desired message. Move the controller to the left while the desired message is displayed.
3
Select “Edit”.
To return to the default message after editing, select “Default”.
Receiving a message popup function
This function is available when the “E-mail Notification Popup” or “SMS/MMS
Notification Popup” are set to on. (P. 346)

“Incoming E-mail Display” or “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” are set to
“Drop-Down”

“Incoming E-mail Display” or “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” are set to “Full
Screen”
When E-mail/ SMS/MMS are received, the incoming message screen is displayed with a sound and it can be operated on the screen.
1
Check the message.
2
Refuse to check the message.
3
Call to receive the message
sender’s phone number.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
When E-mail/ SMS/MMS are received, the incoming message is displayed
on the upper side of the screen with a sound.
5
340
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using the steering wheel switches
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cellular
phone.
Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches
1
Volume switch
During an incoming call: Adjusts the
ring tone volume
During speaking on the phone:
Adjusts in call volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be
adjusted using this button.
2
Off hook switch
• Start call
• Receiving
• Phone top screen display
3
On hook switch
• End call
• Refuse call
4
Talk switch
Press: Turns the voice command system on
Press and hold: Turns the voice command system off
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
341
Bluetooth® phone settings
You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.
“Phone/Message Settings” screen
 “Setup”  “Phone”
Go to “Phone/Message Settings”:
®
1
Register and connect a Bluetooth
device. (P. 321)
2
Adjust the call volume and message
readout volume. (P. 341)
3
Change the contact/call history settings. (P. 343)
4
Change messaging settings.
(P. 346)
5
Change phone display settings. (P. 342)
5
Sound settings
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Sound Settings”
1
Change the ring tone type
2
Adjust the ring tone volume
3
Adjust the message readout volume
4
Change the incoming SMS/MMS
tone type
5
Adjust the incoming SMS/MMS
tone volume
6
Change the incoming email tone
type
7
Adjust the incoming email tone volume
8
Adjust in call tone volume
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
Go to “Sound Settings”:
342
5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Phone display settings
Go to “Phone Display Settings”:
Settings”
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Phone Display
1
Change the incoming call display
2
Set the phonebook/history transfer
status notification display on/off
■ To return to the default volume settings
Move the controller to the left and then select “Default”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-10. Phonebook
343
Contact settings
Individual phonebooks can be registered for a maximum of 5 phones in total.
The data for 2500 contacts (up to 4 numbers per contact) can be registered
in each phonebook.
“Contact/Call History Settings” screen
Go to “Contact/Call History Settings”:
Call History Settings”
1
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Contact/
Select to set the automatic phonebook download on/off
With this setting on, phonebook data will
be automatically transferred.
Depending on the cellular phone, call
history will be also transferred.
Update contacts
3
Change the sort contacts mode
4
Add a favorite (P. 344)
5
Delete a favorite (P. 345)
6
Select to set the display of contact
images on/off
7
Delete call history.
8
Add a new contact (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or compatible
phones with “Automatic Transfer” off)
Input the name, phone number and phone number type to add a new contact.
9
Edit a contact (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or compatible
phones with “Automatic Transfer” off)
Select the desired contact to edit.
10
Delete contacts (P. 345) (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or
compatible phones with “Automatic Transfer” off)
■ Return to the default settings
Move the controller to the left and select “Default”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
2
344
5-10. Phonebook
Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to display audio
system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone does not support either PBAP
or OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts.
Go to “Transfer Contacts”:
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Contact/Call History
Settings”  “Update Contacts from Phone”

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones when “Automatic Transfer” is set to
on
Start the update automatically.

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones when “Automatic Transfer” is set to
off and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones
1
Select to transfer the contact from
the connected cellular phone and
replace the current one.
2
Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected cellular phone to add to the current one.
Registering favorites
You can register the desired contact from the phonebook. Up to 15 contacts per
phone can be registered.
1
Go to “Add Favorite”:
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Contact/Call History
Settings”  “Add Favorite”
2
Choose the contact to register.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-10. Phonebook
345
Removing favorites
1
Go to “Remove Favorite”:
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Contact/Call History Settings”  “Remove Favorite”
2
Select the desired contacts.
You can select all contacts by selecting “Select All”
3
Move the controller to the left and select “Remove”.
Deleting the contacts data
1
Go to “Delete Contact”:
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Contact/Call History
Settings”  “Delete Contacts”
2
Select the desired contacts.
You can select all contacts by selecting “Select All”.
3
Move the controller to the left and select “Delete”.
■ Phonebook data
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
Phonebook data is managed separately for every registered phone. When another
phone is connected, you cannot read the registered data.
■ When transferring contacts
Transfer contacts while the engine is running.
If the cellular phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input “1234” on the
cellular phone for OBEX certification.
■ When you have selected “Replace contacts” or “Add contact” to transfer contacts
If the cellular phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these functions. You
can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
■ Transferring contacts while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer finishes. It may not reconnect depending on the phone which is connected.
346
5-10. Phonebook
Messaging setting
Go to “Messaging Settings”:
tings”
 “Setup”  “Phone”  “Messaging Set-
1
Set the message forwarding from
cellular phones on/off
2
Set the automatic message read out
function on/off
3
Set the new SMS/MMS notification
display on/off
4
Set the new email notification display on/off
5
Set the add vehicle signature function on/off
6
Set the cellular phone’s message
read and unread status update function on/off.
7
Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.
8
Change the incoming email display.
9
Change the account name to “Service name” (names from the connected
device) or “Fixed name” (pre-defined names).
■ Restoring the default settings
Move the controller to the left then select “Default” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-11. Bluetooth®
347
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first
check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device
The hands-free system or Bluetooth® device does not work.
The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone.
 For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system,
check with your Lexus dealer or the following website:
http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink
The Bluetooth® version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version.
 Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth® version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver.
3.0 with EDR or higher). (P. 353)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
348

5-11. Bluetooth®
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.
 Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side.
 Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration
on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.
 Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.
(P. 322)
A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made.
Another Bluetooth® device is already connected.
 Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. (P. 325)
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
 Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
“Check your telephone.” message is displayed.
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
 Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.
 Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.
(P. 322)

When making/receiving a call
A call cannot be made/received.
Your vehicle is in a “No Service” area.
 Move to where “No Service” no longer appears on the display.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-11. Bluetooth®

349
When using the phonebook
Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.
The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data.
 For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system,
check with your Lexus dealer or the following website:
http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off.
 Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on. (P. 343)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.
 Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).
Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.
 Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation
on the phone).
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on.
 Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off. (P. 343)

When using the Bluetooth® message function
Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.
 Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the
phone).
Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.
 Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P. 346)
New message notifications are not displayed.
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.
 Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on. (P. 346)
Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
 Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
Messages cannot be viewed.
5
350

5-11. Bluetooth®
In other situations
Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not
change.
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.
 Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
Radio interference has occurred.
 Turn off Wi-Fi devices or other devices that may emit radio waves.
The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.
 Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then
restart the cellular phone.
 Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth® connection.
 Disable the Wi-Fi connection of the cellular phone.
 Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.
 Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its
source and how its operation might affect this system.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-11. Bluetooth®
351
Bluetooth®
■ When using the Bluetooth® audio system
● In the following situations, the system may not function.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
● There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during Bluetooth® audio
play.
● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system is muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate
and connection status may deteriorate.
● In the following situations, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the cellular phone is turned off
● If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone’s battery is low
● When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.
● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
● When transferring phonebook data from the cellular phone
352
5-11. Bluetooth®
■ Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display.
If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is
touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by
metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/signal status
● This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular
phone itself.
● This system does not have a charging function.
● The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the
device is connected to Bluetooth®.
■ When using the Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
● The Bluetooth® audio connection may be interrupted.
● Noise may be heard during Bluetooth® audio playback.
■ About the contact in this system
The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
● Contact data
● Call history
● Favorite
● Message
When removing a Bluetooth® phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by PIONEER Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-11. Bluetooth®
353
■ Compatible models
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
The Bluetooth® audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifications
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio system.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player connected.
The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications.
● Bluetooth® specification:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It
has outgoing and incoming call functions.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.1)
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data. When a Bluetooth® compatible cellular
phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.1)
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.
• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
This is a profile to using phone message.
If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individually.
354
5-11. Bluetooth®
■ Certification
NOTE:
FCC ID:AJDK066
IC ID:775E-K066
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION:
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in
Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or
more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de
la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition
aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement doit être
installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et
le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Co-location:
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an
antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry
Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not
more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut
fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé
pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son
gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas
l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-11. Bluetooth®
355
■ Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below
to reconnect:
● Select the portable audio player again
● Enter the portable audio player
■ When you sell your car
Be sure to delete your personal data. (P. 289)
CAUTION
■ While driving
NOTICE
■ When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of
the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular
phone.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5
Lexus Display Audio system
Do not operate the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the
Bluetooth® system.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and
the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than
implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
356
5-12. Other function
“Information” screen
Display “Information” screen
 “Info”
Go to “Information”:
1
Display the fuel consumption.
(P. 93)
2
Display the “USB Photo” screen.
(P. 358)
3
Display the weather information.
(P. 360)
4
Display the Traffic Map picture.
Available when in a traffic supported
HD Radio coverage area
Traffic information map
Go to “Traffic Map”:
 “Info”“Traffic Incidents”
1
Current position of your car
2
Traffic information line
The line color means the following:
Red: Heavy congestion
Yellow: Moderate traffic
Green: Free flowing traffic
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-12. Other function
357
■ Certification for U.S. owners
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
358
5-12. Other function
USB photo
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy photo on the Lexus
Display Audio display.
USB photo screen
Go to “USB Photo”:
 “Info”  “USB1 Photo” or “USB2 Photo”
Connecting a USB memory device
P. 284
Menu screen
Move the controller to the left to display the menu screen.
1
Change the full screen mode.
2
Select to set the slide show display
on/off.
Start the slide show at a selected folder.
3
Change the play speed.
4
Change the play mode.
Selecting a folder and a file
1
Move the controller to the right and select “Browse”.
2
Select the desired folder, and then select a desired file to begin using the
selected folder.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-12. Other function
359
■ USB memory functions
P. 316
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory device that can be used for JPEG display.
● Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
• USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
● JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible image size: Maximum 10MB
• Compatible pixel size: Maximum 10,000,000 pixels
NOTICE
■ If the console box lid cannot be fully closed
P. 318
■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
P. 318
5
Lexus Display Audio system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
360
5-12. Other function
Weather information
Weather information for the selected city is displayed.
Available when in weather supported HD Radio coverage area
How to check the weather information
 “Info”  “Weather”
1
Go to “Weather”:
2
Select the desired city/location.
1
Current location of your car
2
Select of the recently checked
location list
Select the desired location on the
recently checked location list.
3
Select of the National City list.
Select the region on the region list
and then select the city on the
National City list.
4
Select of the local location list
Select the location on the local location list.
3
Select the time
1
Display the current weather information.
2
Display the 3 days weather information.
You can display detail of a week,
move the controller right and then
select the desired week.
3
Display the 6/12 hour weather
information.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-12. Other function
361
Voice command system
The voice command system enables the audio and hands-free systems to be
operated using voice commands.
Operations of the voice command system can be performed by selecting the
menu corresponding to each function on the right part of the screen. Even if
any menu is selected, commands displayed on all menus can be operated.
Using the voice command system
1
Press the talk switch.
To cancel the voice command system,
press and hold the talk switch.
2
After a beep sounds, say the desired
command.
On the list screen, you can select the
desired command.
■ Menu screen
1
Offer examples of commands
and operation methods
2
Adjust the settings for voice guidance volume and voice recognition prompts. (“Hints” screen)
(P. 290)
3
Start over voice recognition
(except “Hints” screen)
4
Cancel voice recognition
■ Microphone
P. 331
■ When using the microphone
● It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.
● Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
To display the menu screen, move
the controller to the left.
5
362
5-12. Other function
● Voice commands may not be recognized if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and
using voice commands may not be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech
patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
■ When searching for a track
● A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and playback.
(P. 284)
● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks can
be searched using voice commands.
● Recognition data is updated under the following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data has changed.
• When the voice recognition language is changed. (P. 287)
● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search cannot be
performed using a voice command.
■ The Gracenote® media database
P. 310
Casual speech recognization
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.
In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and
directly state the desired operation.
This function is available in English, Spanish and French.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5-12. Other function
363
■ Expression examples for each function
Command
Expression examples
“Call <name> <type>”
Get me <Robert Brown>.
I need to call <Robert Brown> at <Work> right away.
“Dial <number>”
Please dial the number <3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.
“Play Artist <name>”
Play the artist <XXXXX>.
I’d like to hear the band <XXXXX>.*
“Play Album <name>”
Play album <XXXXX>.
Music from album <XXXXX>.*
*: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
Command list
Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below as
examples.

Basic
Command
Action
Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands or operation methods
“Go Back”
Returns to the previous screen
“Go to <tab>”
Displays the command list of the selected tab
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Lexus Display Audio system
“Help”
5
364

5-12. Other function
Phone
Command
Action
“Redial”
Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call
“Call Back”
Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming
call
“Show Recent Calls”
Displays the call history screen
“Dial <phone number>”
Places a call to the said phone number
“Call <contacts> <phone- Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from
types>”
the phone book

Audio
Command
Action
“Play Playlist <playlists>”
Plays tracks from the selected playlist
“Play Artist <artist>”
Plays tracks from the selected artist
“Play Song <songs>”
Plays the selected track
“Play Album <albums>”
Plays tracks from the selected album
“Turn Music On/Off”
Turns the audio system on/off
Audio source name
Selects audio source

Info
Command
Action
“Show Forecast”
Displays weather information
“Show Traffic”
Displays traffic information
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
365
5-12. Other function
LEXUS Enform Remote
Lexus Enform Remote is a cellular phone application that lets you view and
remotely control certain aspects of your vehicle.
For details about the functions and services of this application, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
Function of the Lexus Enform Remote is achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module).
Subscription
After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement, download the
Lexus Enform Remote app from your cellular phone's app store, and register
within the app (or enroll and complete registration at the dealer), you can begin
using these services. (P. 400)
A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further subscription details.
5
Lexus Display Audio system
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
366
5-12. Other function
■ Availability of service
Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and
Alaska.
■ Lexus Enform Remote Information
● Lexus Enform Remote should only be used by authorized users.
● Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when
operating Lexus Enform Remote.
In some states, use of Lexus Enform Remote may violate state or local laws. Before
using Lexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws.
● Any malfunction of the Lexus should be repaired by your Lexus dealer.
● Lexus Enform Remote is designed to work at temperatures above -22F (-30C). This
specification is related to the Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is dependent on the
vehicle's operating temperature range which may be different.
● Content is subject to change without notice.
● Some features of the Lexus Enform Remote may not be available on some models.
● Additional information can be found at www.lexus.com/enform/.
● Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception
level.
■ Safety information for Lexus Enform Remote
P. 404
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
367
Interior features
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system
Automatic air conditioning
system ......................................... 368
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/
seat ventilators...........................376
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..........................378
• Interior lights .......................... 379
• Personal lights........................379
6-3. Using the storage
features
List of storage features..............381
• Glove box............................... 382
• Console box.......................... 382
• Cup holders/
bottle holders........................ 383
Trunk features ............................. 385
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6
6-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features ............387
• Sun visors ................................ 387
• Vanity mirrors ........................ 387
• Clock ........................................387
• Power outlet .......................... 388
• Armrest....................................389
• Rear sunshade.......................389
• Assist grips............................... 391
• Coat hooks.............................. 391
Garage door opener................392
Compass ....................................... 397
LEXUS Enform Safety
Connect..................................... 400
368
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Press the “MENU” button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller, then select “Climate” to display the air conditioning operation screen.
For details on the Lexus Display Audio controller, refer to “Lexus Display
Audio controller” on P. 278.
Vehicles with a navigation system: Press the “MENU” button on the Remote
Touch, then select “Climate” to display the air conditioning control screen.
For details on the Remote Touch, refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Air conditioning controls
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
To adjust the temperature setting,
touch and slide your finger up or
down on the sensor.
The temperature setting can also be
adjusted by touching on the sensor.
When the temperature setting is
changed, a buzzer sounds.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
369
■ Fan speed setting
Press
to increase the fan speed.
Press
to decrease the fan speed.
■ Change the airflow mode
To change the airflow, press
.
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.
■ Other functions
● Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (P. 371)
● Defogging the windshield (P. 372)
● Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (P. 372)
Air conditioning control screen

With a Lexus Display Audio
1
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting.
2
Adjust the fan speed setting
3
Select to set auto mode on/off, fan
off and displaying the option control screen (P. 370)
Select the air flow mode
5
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
1
Move the Lexus Display Audio controller left/right to select the desired item
( 1 to 5 ).
2
When 1 , 2 or 5 is selected:
Move the controller forward/backward or turn it left/right for adjusting.
When 3 or 4 is selected:
Move the controller forward/backward or turn it left/right to select a screen
button, then press the controller.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
4
6
370

6-1. Using the air conditioning system
With a navigation system
1
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
2
Adjust the fan speed setting
3
Select the air flow mode
4
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
5
Display the option control screen
(P. 370)
6
Turn the fan off
7
Select to set auto mode on/off
To adjust or select settings, move the Remote Touch knob to select the screen
button, and then press the Remote Touch knob to enter the selected function.
■ Option control screen
The functions can be switched on and off.
1
Cooling and dehumidification
function
2
Adjusting the temperature for
driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) (P. 371)
3
Removing pollen from the air
(Micro dust and pollen filter)
(P. 371)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
371
Using automatic mode
1
Press
, or select “AUTO” on the air conditioning control screen.
2
Adjust the temperature setting.
3
To stop the operation, press
control screen.
or select “OFF” on the air conditioning
■ Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode
indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
■ Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately
(“DUAL” mode)
To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform any of the following procedures:
● Press
.
● Select “DUAL” on the option control screen.
● Adjust the passenger’s side temperature setting.
The indicator comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.
While in “DUAL” mode, the temperature of the rear air outlets is set at the righthand side temperature setting.
Other functions
Press
to change to recirculated air mode.
Press
to change to outside air mode.
The indicator above the selected button comes on.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Select
on the option control screen.
When the micro dust and pollen filter is on,
is displayed on the air conditioning control screen.
In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate.
The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
6
372
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press
.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated
air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.
■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew
and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press
.
The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Turns on/off.
The indicator comes on when the
windshield wiper de-icer is on.
The windshield de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
373
Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the selected
airflow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front

Rear
6
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
To close the vent, move the knob to the most outside position. (rear outlets only)
2
Turn the knob to open or close the vent
■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys (vehicles with driving position
memory)
● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key's registered air conditioning settings.
● When the engine switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
● The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or
if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door.
● The doors that can recall the air conditioning setting* when unlocked using the smart
access system with push-button start can be changed. For details, contact your Lexus
dealer.
*: The doors that can recall the driving position memory are changed at the same time.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
1
374
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately
after
is pressed or “AUTO” is selected.
■ Using the voice command system (vehicles with a navigation system)
Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning
(“A/C”) on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn
(“A/C”) off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the
recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75F (24C) and the air conditioning system
is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system
may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel
efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
375
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
is pressed or “A/C” is
selected.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the
vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior
to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately
after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
P. 448
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. A/C Auto switch operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 558)
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
6
● Do not place anything on the instrument
■ To prevent burns
● Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers are on.
● Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars
when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is
stopped.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing
the windshield defoggers from defogging.
376
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators
Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering
wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.
CAUTION
● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in
contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
● Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheating
• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.
• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
NOTICE
● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is off.
Heated steering wheel
Turn the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heated steering wheel is operating.
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
377
● The heated steering wheel can be used when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
● The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
Seat heaters
Each time the switch is pressed, the
intensity of the seat heater changes and
the level indicator lights (amber) light
as follows:
Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments
lit)  Lo (1 segment lit)  Off
Type A
Type B
■ The seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Seat heater timer control
Seat ventilators
Each time the switch is pressed, the
intensity of the seat ventilator changes
and the level indicator lights (green)
light as follows:
Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments
lit)  Lo (1 segment lit)  Off
The seat ventilators can be used when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6
Interior features
To enable seat heater timer control, press and hold the driver and front passenger seat
heater switches at the same time until a buzzer sounds once. If a seat heater is turned on
while seat heater timer control is enabled, the intensity of the seat heater will automatically change from HiMidLo.
The timing of the change in seat heater intensity differs depending on the temperature
inside the cabin, etc. when the seat heater is operating.
To disable seat heater timer control, press and hold the driver and front passenger seat
heater switches at the same time until a buzzer sounds twice.
378
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
1
Outer foot lights
2
Front interior light
3
Front personal lights
4
Inside door handle lights
5
Rear interior light
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6
Rear personal lights
(P. 379)
7
Power window switch lights
(P. 379)
8
Door courtesy lights
9
Footwell lights
(P. 379)
(P. 379)
6-2. Using the interior lights
379
Interior lights
1
Turns the light on/off
2
Turns the door position on/off
Personal lights
Turns the light on/off

Front

Rear
6
Interior features
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
380
6-2. Using the interior lights
■ The interior lights and personal lights can be operated when
The interior lights and personal lights can be used regardless of the engine switch mode.
However, when the engine switch is turned off, they can be used only when the battery
protection function is not operating.
■ Battery protection function
To prevent the battery from being discharged, approximately 20 minutes after the
engine switch is turned off, the power supplied to the interior lights, personal lights, and
other lights will be cut off automatically. (If the interior lights, etc. are left on when the
engine switch is turned off, they will be turned off automatically.)
To turn the interior lights, etc. back on, turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode or operate the interior light switch until the interior lights turn on.
If any of the lights are illuminated automatically due to the illuminated entry system, the
battery protection function will be canceled.
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the presence of the
electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are
opened/closed.
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 552)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-3. Using the storage features
381
List of storage features
1
Glove box
(P. 382)
3
Cup holders
(P. 383)
2
Bottle holders
(P. 383)
4
Console box
(P. 382)
6
CAUTION
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
• Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other
stored items.
• Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
● When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
● Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
382
6-3. Using the storage features
Glove box
1
Open (press the button)
2
Unlock with the mechanical key
3
Lock with the mechanical key
● The glove box light turns on when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode.
● The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 112)
● The insert inside the glove box can be
removed.
Console box
Push the knob.
Lift by hand to fully open the console
box.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-3. Using the storage features
383
Cup holders/bottle holders
■ Cup holders

Front

Rear
To open, pull down the armrest and
press the button and release the rear
cup holder on the armrest.
■ Bottle holders
6
● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
● The rubber mats at the bottom of the front cup holders can be removed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
● When storing a bottle, close the cap.
384
6-3. Using the storage features
CAUTION
● Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders and bot-
tle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of
an accident or sudden braking, causing injury.
● To prevent burns, cover hot drinks when placed in the cup holders.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the rear cup holder, stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-3. Using the storage features
385
Trunk features
Cargo hooks
Raise the hooks when needed.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
CAUTION
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.
First-aid kit storage belt
1
Loosen the belt
2
Tighten the belt
6
Interior features
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
386
6-3. Using the storage features
Luggage mat
1
Hold the hook and lift up the luggage mat.
2
Secure the luggage mat using the
hook.
NOTICE
When closing the trunk door, do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge
of the trunk. The luggage mat may get damaged.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
387
Other interior features
Sun visors
1
To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
2
To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to the
side.
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
6
The clock can be adjusted.
1
Pressing and holding will move the
clock hands backward.
2
Pressing and holding will move the
clock hands forward.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
Clock
388
6-4. Using the other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A.
Open the lid.
● The power outlet can be used when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
● To fully close the console box with the cable
routed to outside the console box, insert the
cable into the holder.
NOTICE
● To avoid the damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when the power
outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a
short circuit.
● To prevent blown fuse, do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
389
Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Rear sunshade (if equipped)
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered.
Raise/lower
6
Interior features
● The rear sunshade can be used when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the engine
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
390
6-4. Using the other interior features
● Reverse operation feature: To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade auto-
matically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
• The button is pressed again.*
• The shift lever is shifted into P.
• The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h).
If the engine is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the button.
*: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has been
pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.
CAUTION
When the rear sunshade is being operated, do not place fingers or other objects in the
fastener section or in the opening. They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
● To prevent battery discharge, do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is
off.
● To ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade, observe the following precautions:
• Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sunshade.
• Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
• Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
• Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
• Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
391
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body while
sitting on the seat.
CAUTION
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not put a heavy load on the assist grip.
Coat hooks
The coat hooks are provided with the
rear assist grips.
6
Interior features
CAUTION
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
392
6-4. Using the other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates,
entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other
devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink®.
Programming the HomeLink®
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can
be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming
method below appropriate for the device.
1
Indicator light
2
Buttons
■ Before programming HomeLink®
● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices
may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of
the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door openers manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling
code protection. If this is the case, you will need a stepladder or other sturdy,
safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener
motor.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
393
■ Programming HomeLink®
1
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light
in view while programming.

For U.S.A. owner’s
2
Press and hold the HomeLink®
button you want to program and
the handheld transmitter button
simultaneously.
When
the
®
HomeLink
indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
Programming has completed when the indicator light changes to a rapid flash.

Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the
Canadian market
With one hand, press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program. With your other hand, press and release the remote control transmitter every 2 seconds and repeat this cycle until the HomeLink® indicator
light starts to flash rapidly. Then, release the buttons.
3
Test the HomeLink® operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button and observing the indicator light:
● If the indicator light is solid/
continuous, programming has
been completed and your
device should activate when
the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
● If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns into a
solid/continuous light, proceed with the following instructions 4 for
programming a rolling code system.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
2
6
394

6-4. Using the other interior features
Programming a rolling code system
4
Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Please refer to the operator’s manual supplied with the garage
door opener motor for details.
5
Press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button.
Perform 6 within 30 seconds
after performing 5 .
6
Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button (located
inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds
and release it. Repeat this
sequence (press/hold/release)
up to 3 times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor
activates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink® signal.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining
HomeLink® buttons.
■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button
7
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have
devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1
With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
2
When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing, continue to hold the
HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” from 1 (it
takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
395
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for
10 seconds until the indicator light
flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink®
memory.
■ Programs stored in the HomeLink® memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already
has a code registered to it, the already registered code is not erased.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Interior features
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6
396
6-4. Using the other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of
danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or
device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
397
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
Operation
To turn the compass on or off, push the
switch.
Displays and directions
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
6
Interior features
Display
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
398
6-4. Using the other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s
magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
1
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
2
Press the switch until a number (1
to 15) appears on the compass
display.
3
Press the switch and referring to the map above, select the number of the
zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is
complete.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
399
■ Circling calibration
When “C” appears on the display,
drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less in a circle until a direction is
displayed.
If there is not enough space to drive
in a circle, drive around the block
until the direction is displayed.
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower,
between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
6
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do
not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.)
as they may interfere with the calibration.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
■ While driving the vehicle
400
6-4. Using the other interior features
LEXUS Enform Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide
safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by
Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days
per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as
in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available
at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such thenapplicable Terms and Conditions.
System components
1
“SOS” button
2
LED light indicators
3
Microphone
: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
401
Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers.
(P. 402)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 403)
● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 403)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 403)
Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are
enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus
dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the “SOS” button in
your vehicle for further subscription details.
6
■ Safety Connect Services Information
Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with
the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in
operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception,
which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service
support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location
will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in
Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act
and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety
Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Interior features
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety
402
6-4. Using the other interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact
your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is
designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the
nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests
that assistance be sent to the location.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6-4. Using the other interior features
403
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to
assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report,
call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-2553987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle,
Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the
Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your
vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you
are not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
6
Interior features
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect responsecenter agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services
and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions,
which are available at Lexus.com.
404
6-4. Using the other interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio
transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF)
signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted
RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)
[1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of
the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries
reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to
those standards.
■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B
FCC ID: N7NGTM2
FCC WARNING:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or
more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
405
Maintenance and care
7
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................406
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................409
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements...............................412
General maintenance............... 415
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ..................................... 418
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................. 419
Hood .................................................421
Positioning a floor jack............. 422
Engine compartment ............... 423
Tires..................................................434
Tire inflation pressure ...............443
Wheels ...........................................446
Air conditioning filter ...............448
Electronic key battery..............450
Checking and replacing
fuses.............................................. 452
Light bulbs..................................... 455
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
406
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel
●
●
●
●
wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ Self-restoring coat
The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches
caused in a car wash etc.
● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant.
● The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside temperature.
The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying
warm water.
● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc. cannot be restored.
● Do not use wax that contain abrasives.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your
vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
■ When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the
door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with
push-button start. (P. 117)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-1. Maintenance and care
407
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or
abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving a long
distance in hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-repellent coating (if equipped)
● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be
repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the
electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop
sensor
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
■ Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If
this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield
wipers. (P. 190)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or
other serious injuries and cause damage to the
wiper blades.
408
7-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum
wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low
humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield wipers. (P. 190)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact
with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
7-1. Maintenance and care
409
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it
in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted
detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remain-
ing traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off
7
the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
410
7-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to
apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let
them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts
periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could
be damaged.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 38)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-1. Maintenance and care
411
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s
painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the
vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they
may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact
with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the
vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LDA [Lane Departure
Alert])
Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (P. 217).
If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LDA may not operate properly or may
cause a malfunction.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the
rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running
parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
412
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks.
Lexus recommends the following maintenance:
General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by
yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to
the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-2. Maintenance
413
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance
of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than
a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (For vehicle sold in U.S.A.
and IS200t for Canada)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule,
please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:
1 While the engine is running, switch the multi-information display to the “Settings”
screen. (P. 81)
2 Select “Scheduled Maintenance” on the “Settings” screen.
3 Select “Yes” on the “Scheduled Maintenance” screen.
A message will be displayed when the reset
procedure has been completed.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest ser-
vice information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your
vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
414
7-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component
wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area
immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds
which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 431)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
415
7-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at
the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should
be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for
advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
Battery
Check the connections.
(P. 431)
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
Engine/intercooler coolant
Is the engine/intercooler coolant at the correct level?
(P. 428)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at the correct level?
Exhaust system
There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
(P. 430)
(P. 425)
Radiator, condenser and The radiator and condenser should be free from forintercooler radiator
eign objects.
(P. 429)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 433)
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
416
7-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Accelerator pedal
Check points
• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Automatic
transmission • When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is
“Park” mechanism
the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance
from the floor?
(P. 533)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of
free play?
(P. 533)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the
brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor
when the brakes are applied.
Head restraints
• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on,
is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of
free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds coming
from the steering wheel.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-2. Maintenance
417
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Doors/trunk
• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after
the vehicle has been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Windshield wipers
• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield without
streaking or skipping.
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
418
7-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of
the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission
control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be
repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction
and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven
40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
419
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
(P. 431)
Brake fluid level
(P. 430)
Parts and tools
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
• SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality
ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite
and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology
Engine/intercooler
coolant level
(P. 428)
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level
(P. 425)
Light bulbs
(P. 455)
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Wrench

Radiator, condenser
and intercooler radiator (P. 429)
Tire inflation pres- • Tire pressure gauge
sure (P. 443)
Washer fluid
(P. 433)
• Flathead screwdriver
• Compressed air source
• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
Fuses
(P. 452)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
420
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly,
become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe
the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving
as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and
battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(P. 429)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in
your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt
in the air.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
421
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause
an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
422
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with
the jack and perform the operation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
◆ Front
1
2WD models
2
AWD models
◆ Rear
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
423
Engine compartment

IS350/IS300
1
Fuse boxes
(P. 452)
6
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 430)
2
Battery
(P. 431)
7
Washer fluid tank
3
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 425)
8
Electric cooling fans
9
Condenser
(P. 429)
4
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 428)
10
Radiator
(P. 429)
5
Engine oil filler cap
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
(P. 426)
(P. 433)
424
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS200t
1
Fuse boxes
(P. 452)
7
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 430)
2
Battery
(P. 431)
8
Washer fluid tank
3
Intercooler
9
Electric cooling fans
4
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 425)
10
Condenser
(P. 429)
11
Intercooler radiator
(P. 428)
5
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 426)
12
Radiator
(P. 429)
6
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 428)
13
Intercooler coolant reservoir
(P. 429)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
(P. 433)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
425
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on
the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil

1
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning
it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.
IS350/IS300
3
Wipe the dipstick clean.
4
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out and check the oil
level.
Low
2
Normal
3
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.
6
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
IS200t
7
Maintenance and care
1

426
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same
type as that already in the engine.

IS350/IS300

IS200t
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding
oil.
Engine oil selection
P. 528
Oil quantity (Low  Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
1
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations,
oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil
maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after
replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
427
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After changing the engine oil (IS200t only)
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
1
While the vehicle is stopped, press the
meter control switch on the steering wheel.
2
Press the  or  meter control switch on the steering wheel, select,
3
press the
meter control switch.
Press  or  meter control switch on the steering wheel to select “Oil Maintenance”
and then press
.
and then
Select “Yes” and then press
.
A message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
4
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin dis-
orders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of
used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning
recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
7
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
■ When replacing the engine oil
428
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
■ Engine coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.

IS350/IS300
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL” line
3
“LOW” line

IS200t
If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line.
(P. 516)
■ Intercooler coolant reservoir (IS200t only)
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
1
Reservoir cap
2
“F” line
3
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line,
add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 516)
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
429
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the
cooling system.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap (IS350/IS300) or intercooler coolant reservoir cap (IS200t). (P. 519)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and
antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
Radiator, condenser and intercooler radiator (if equipped)
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler radiator (if equipped) as they may
be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler radiator (if equipped) and clear
away any foreign objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition,
have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
7
430
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
on the tank.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid
Items
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
431
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no
loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1
Terminals
2
Hold-down clamp
■ Before recharging
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive.
Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground
cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting
the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be
possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not
start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from
the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is disconnected and
reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in
before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnecting the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch
mode prior to the battery being disconnected is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.
432
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take
the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to
the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention
immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories
are turned off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
433
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the multiinformation display, the washer tank
may be empty. Add washer fluid.
CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
434
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires
for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
1
New tread
2
Worn tread
3
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “” mark, etc., molded
into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Tire rotation

Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire
inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.

Front
Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes
Tires cannot be rotated.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
435
Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by
a screen display and a warning light. (P. 488)
● The tire pressure detected by the tire
pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display.
◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID
codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 437)
◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum-
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
stances:
● When rotating the tires.
7
436
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. (P. 534)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
3
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
4
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
5
Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode and
then turn the engine switch off.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
437
◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID
code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus
dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and
bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of
a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire
pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the
tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom
or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks.
Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ When rotating the tires
Make sure that the engine switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode, the tire position information will not be updated.
If this accidentally occurs, either turn the engine switch to off and then to IGNITION ON
mode, or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.
438
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use
snow tires or tire chains* on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 18-inch tires. Snow tires should be used instead.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For
the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit
at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 540)
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under
dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as
snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For
driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended.
When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for
driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy
or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If
you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make
sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed
on all wheels. (P. 270)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
439
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
Tire chains etc. are equipped.
An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
• If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered
in the tire pressure warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions,
the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be
extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the
engine switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.
● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the
tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
440
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated
attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
● Initiator
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ22AAA
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
● Transmitter
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: PAXPMVC010
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
441
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drivetrain as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
● Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may
not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire
inflation pressure is actually normal.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators
should not come within 17.7 in. (450 mm) of
the tire pressure warning system initiators.
The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
7
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
442
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water
could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves
could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified.
The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or
other qualified service shop as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure
to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing
the tire. (P. 435)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning
ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires
themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be
damaged more severely.
● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so
may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
443
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure and tire size are displayed on
the tire and loading information label.
(P. 534)
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
444
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
Tire valve
2
Tire pressure gauge
1
Remove the tire valve cap.
2
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment,
apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drivetrain
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
445
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than
1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated
in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could
lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion
joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air
leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
7
446
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent
to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your alumi-
num wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are
still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber
hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event
of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 435)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
447
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s
Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing
so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified
service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
448
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
Turn the engine switch off.
2
Open the glove box. Lift up the side
with the stay, disconnect the stay
tabs and remove the partition by
pulling horizontally.
3
Press the tabs and remove the filter
cover.
4
Press the tabs and remove the filter
case.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5
449
Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
450
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2032
Replacing the battery
1
Take out the mechanical key.
2
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, wrap the
tip of the screwdriver with tape.
3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
451
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or
camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not
function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away
from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
452
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If
this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1
Turn the engine switch off.
2
Open the Fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3
453
Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuses can be removed
using the pullout tool.
4
Check if the fuse is blown.
1
Normal fuse
2
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.

Type A

Type B
7
Type C
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)

Type D
Maintenance and care

454
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (P. 455)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
455
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 536)
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
456
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Bulb locations
■ Front

Vehicles with discharge headlights
Front turn signal light
■ Rear
1
Back-up light
2
Rear turn signal light
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)

Vehicles with LED headlights
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
457
Replacing light bulbs
■ Front turn signal lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)
1
To ensure enough space to perform work, turn the steering
wheel to rotate the front wheel
away from the bulb to be
replaced.
Remove the 2 fender liner clips.
Turn the steering wheel to the left
when replacing the right side light
bulb, and turn the steering wheel to
the right when replacing the left side
light bulb.
To take out the lower clip, turn the
head of the clip to unlock it, then
remove it by pulling.
2
Unfasten the clamp, and pull back
the fender liner.
When unfastening the clamp, wrap
the tip of the screwdriver with tape to
protect the vehicle from damage.
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
3
7
458
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Remove the light bulb.
5
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
After installing the light bulb, turn on
the front turn signal light to visually
check that there is no light leaking
from the bulb base.
6
Reinstall the fender liner, fasten
the clamp and install the 2 clips.
Install the lower clip by inserting it
with the clip groove held vertically
straight.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
459
■ Front turn signal lights (vehicles with LED headlights)
1
For the left side only: Pinch the
clip to remove the washer fluid
filler opening.
2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3
Remove the light bulb.
7
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
After installing the light bulb, turn on
the front turn signal light to visually
check that there is no light leaking
from the bulb base.
5
After replacing the left side bulb, install the washer fluid filler opening to its
original position.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Maintenance and care
4
460
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear turn signal lights
1
Open the trunk, and remove the
2 covers and 2 screws.
When removing the cover, wrap the
tip of the screwdriver with tape to
protect the vehicle from damage.
2
Push and pull the light unit toward
the rear of the vehicle as shown in
the illustration to remove it.
Apply protective tape to the peripheral of the light unit installation surface on the vehicle body, such as the
rear bumper, to protect the vehicle
from damage.
Pushing on the portion A in the illustration toward the rear of the vehicle
will make disengagement of the tabs
easier.
3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4
Remove the light bulb.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5
461
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
After installing the light bulb, turn on
the rear turn signal light to visually
check that there is no light leaking
from the bulb base.
6
Align the tabs and push the light
unit toward the front of the vehicle
to install it.
Remove the protective tape applied
to the peripheral of the light unit
installation surface on the vehicle
body.
7
Install the 2 screws and 2 covers.
7
Maintenance and care
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
462
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Back-up light
1
Open the trunk, remove the 3
clips on the side which the bulb is
to be replaced and pull back the
trunk lid cover.
2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3
Remove the light bulb.
Pull out the connector carefully,
ensuring that excessive pulling load is
not applied to the wire harness.
4
Install a new light bulb then install
the bulb base to the light unit by
inserting it and turning the bulb
base clockwise.
After installing the light bulb, turn on
the back-up light to visually check
that there is no light leaking from the
bulb base.
5
Reinstall the trunk lid cover with the 3 clips.
To install the clips, simply push them in.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
463
■ Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
● Headlights
● Parking lights and daytime running lights
● Side marker lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Fog lights (if equipped)
● Outer foot lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
7
Maintenance and care
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out
temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.
■ LED Lights
The lights other than the discharge headlights (if equipped), front turn signal lights, rear
turn signal lights, back-up light and outer foot lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If
any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light
replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ When replacing the front turn signal lights (vehicles with LED headlights)
When the washer fluid filler opening is removed with a large amount of washer fluid contained in the washer tank, washer fluid may spill onto the vehicle and cleaning may be
required.
■ When replacing light bulbs
P. 454
464
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the
lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting
moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result
in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Vehicles with discharge headlights:
While the headlights are turned on, and for a
short time after they have been turned off,
metal components at the rear of the headlight
assembly will be extremely hot. To prevent
burns, do not touch these metal components
until you are certain they have cooled down.
Metal components
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are
turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in death
or serious injury by electric shock.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply
circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
465
When trouble arises
8
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ..................466
If your vehicle has
to be stopped
in an emergency...................... 467
8-2. Steps to take
in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................468
If you think something
is wrong........................................474
Fuel pump shut off system ...... 475
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds...........................................476
If a warning message
is displayed ................................482
If you have a flat tire................... 496
If the engine will not start ........506
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P .................... 508
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............509
If the vehicle battery
is discharged.............................. 512
If your vehicle overheats .......... 516
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................................520
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
466
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has
to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signals will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the
battery may discharge.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-1. Essential information
467
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in
the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
1
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
2
Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N
3
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4
Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
3
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as
much as possible.
4
To stop the engine, press and hold
the engine switch for 2 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more
5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
8
468
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and
local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
469
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.

From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
470
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Using a flatbed truck
If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the
locations shown in the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie down
your vehicle, the angles shaded in black
must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or
the vehicle may be damaged.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily
towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This
should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 50 miles (80 km)
at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
471
Emergency towing procedure
1
Take out the towing eyelet. (P. 497)
2
Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.
3
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole
and tighten partially by hand.
4
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench
or hard metal bar.
8
Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
6
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
7
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: P. 508
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
5
472
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.
■ Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is installed in the trunk. (P. 497)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
 2WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground, the
drivetrain and related parts may be damaged
or an accident may occur due to a change in
direction of the vehicle.

AWD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground, the
drivetrain or related parts may be damaged,
the vehicle may fly off the truck.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
473
CAUTION
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive
stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains
may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.
■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock
mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the oppo-
site end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
474
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.
Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
475
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
1
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.
2
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and
is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
476
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light
Warning light/Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that:
• The brake fluid level is low; or
• The brake system is malfunctioning
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released.
If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the
system is operating normally.
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
(Canada)
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(Canada)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
477
Warning light/Details/Actions
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is
not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 255)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision system is disabled.
(P. 256)
• The light will turn on when the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
system is disabled. (P. 251)
• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be used.
(P. 490)
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;
• The TRAC (Traction Control) system; or
• The hill-start assist control system
The light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC system is operating.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*2
Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed
 Check that all the doors and the trunk are closed.
Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts
 Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s
seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light
(warning buzzer) turn off.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to
indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
 P. 482
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (10 L, 2.2
Imp. gal.) or less
 Refuel the vehicle.
478
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details/Actions
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
• Natural causes (P. 479)
• Flat tire (P. 496)
 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does
not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the
system checked by your Lexus dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
 Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.
*1: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 485
*2: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 484
*3: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not
fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer
sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer
sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will
sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will
sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer
will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
479
■ SRS warning light
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side
impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear),
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 38)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor
may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger
is not sitting in the seat.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the
electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may
sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting
the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with the spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat
tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
P. 439
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
480
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it
with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose
control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
481
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function
properly.
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning
system may not operate properly.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
NOTICE
8
482
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform
the following actions:


1
Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models (when the main
meter is in the center position)
F SPORT models (when the main
meter is in the right-side position)
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a
message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
2
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights come on again after the following actions have been
performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
483
Warning message and warning buzzer list
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that:
• There is a high possibility of a frontal collision; or
• The pre-collision braking function is operating
A buzzer also sounds.
 Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the engine was stopped with the shift lever
not in P
A buzzer also sounds.
 Shift the shift lever to P.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the engine was stopped while driving
A buzzer also sounds.
 Stop the vehicle in a safe place such as the shoulder
of a road.
(Flashes)
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead
(in vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
8
(If equipped)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Indicates that:
• The brake fluid level is low; or
• The brake system is malfunctioning
A buzzer also sounds.
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the
vehicle may be dangerous.
When trouble arises
Alerts the driver that the vehicle has deviated from the
lane (while the LDA [Lane Departure Alert] system is
operating)
The lane line on the side the vehicle has deviated from
flashes in yellow.
The warning buzzer sounds continuously.
 Check around the vehicle and back to inside of the
lane lines.
484
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are not fully
closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate
that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.
 Make sure that all the doors are closed.
Indicates that the hood is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate
that the hood is not yet fully closed.
 Close the hood.
Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate
that the trunk is not yet fully closed.
 Close the trunk.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist-sensor
The assist-sensors flash.
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that an intuitive parking assist sensor is dirty or
covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
 Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
485
Details/Actions
Indicates that the vehicle is being driven at 3 mph (5
km/h) or more with the parking brake still engaged.
A buzzer also sounds.
 Release the parking brake.
Indicates that the shift lever was used to attempt to shift
to the first gear position in M mode on a slippery road
surface
The gear position will not shift from the second gear.
A buzzer also sounds.
 Drive the vehicle in the second or a higher gear
position.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
 P. 516
8
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance
A buzzer also sounds.
 Turn off snow mode.
If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set
them to a mode other than AUTO or high speed
wiper operation.
When trouble arises
Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered with
ice
A buzzer also sounds.
 Clean the sensor.
486
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
Details/Actions
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system is
suspended (The camera sensor temperature is higher
than the operation temperature range)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Restart the LDA after driving for a while.
Indicates that a Blind Spot Monitor sensor or the surrounding area on the bumper is dirty or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
 Clean the sensor and its surrounding area on the
bumper.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The cruise control system; or
• The dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped)
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
A buzzer also sounds.
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
487
Details/Actions
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(AWD models)
Indicates a malfunction in the VGRS (Variable Gear
Ratio Steering) system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the engine was stopped while driving
A buzzer also sounds.
 Operate the steering wheel with more force than
usual.
Indicates that the engine switch is turned off or turned to
ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened
while the lights are turned on
A buzzer also sounds.
 Turn the lights off.
(Flashes)
8
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the windows are not fully closed (with the
engine switch off, and the driver’s door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Close all the windows.
(Flashes)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the
engine switch off, and the driver’s door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Close the moon roof.
488
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that the windows and the moon roof are not
fully closed (with the engine switch off, and the driver’s
door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Close all the windows and the moon roof.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake override system
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that engine oil level is low
A buzzer also sounds.
 Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The automatic headlight leveling system; or
• The Automatic High Beam system (if equipped)
• The LED headlight system (if equipped)
A buzzer also sounds.
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedal are being
depressed simultaneously
 Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the tire inflation pressure is low
 Check the tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the
appropriate level.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
489
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine
switch off then on again.
If the tire pressure warning indicator flashes for 1
minute then illuminates, there is a malfunction in the
system. Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer.
Indicates that the tire position information cannot be recognized
 Drive for a short while and check if the display
updates.
If the radio wave conditions improve, the display
may return to normal. If the tire pressure is still not
displayed after driving for several minutes, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine switch off
then on again, and start driving.
If the tire pressure is still not displayed even after
repeating this process several times, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low
 Add washer fluid.
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal.
(10 L, 2.2 Imp. gal.) or less
 Refuel the vehicle.
Indicates that the TRAC (Traction Control) system has
been deactivated
 Turn the TRAC on. (P. 251)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
(The indicator will not work properly unless the message
has been reset.)
 Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.
After changing the engine oil, the message should
be reset.
8
490
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
(If equipped)
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. (After
the engine oil is changed and the message has been
reset.)
 Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by
your Lexus dealer. After changing the engine oil, the
message should be reset. (P. 413)
(U.S.A. only)
(U.S.A. only)
(If equipped)
Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule* should be performed soon.
 Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km)
after the message has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance. Please reset
the message after the maintenance is performed.
(P. 413)
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond
to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*.
 Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km)
after the message has been reset. (The indicator will
not work properly unless the message has been
reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset
the message after the maintenance is performed.
(P. 413)
Indicates that the Automatic High Beam switch is
pressed while the headlights are in low beam.
 Turn the high beam on and press the Automatic
High Beam switch again.
Indicates that, since the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
system was turned off, the pre-collision brake system
operation is stopped
 Turn the VSC on. (P. 251)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is not currently functional because the grille cover or the sensor is
dirty
 Check the grille cover and the sensor and clean
them if they are dirty.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
491
Details/Actions
Indicates that operation of large electricity consuming
systems such as the air conditioning system are suspended
 Stop using unnecessary electric components to
reduce electricity consumption. Wait a while until
the electric power supply is restored.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system
cannot be used because the vehicle speed is lower than
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h)
 Drive the vehicle at 32 mph (50 km/h) or higher.
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ Warning messages
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
The warning message illustrations used are intended as examples, and may differ from
the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following situations, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases:
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal
■ The LDA (Lane Departure Alert) lane departure warning function (if equipped)
In the following situations, the warning message will not be displayed even if a lane line is
crossed.
● When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system functions
● When the lane lines cannot be recognized
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 413)
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
P. 439
■ Warning buzzer
P. 479
492
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Continuous
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
Details/Actions
The driver’s door was opened when
the shift lever was not in P and the
engine switch was not turned off.
 Shift the shift lever to P.

(Flashes)
Continuous
Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
Once

(Flashes)
Once
Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
The driver’s door was opened and
closed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle, the shift lever was
not in P and the engine switch was
not turned off.
 Shift the shift lever to P.
 Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
The electronic key is not detected
when an attempt is made to start the
engine.
 Start the engine with the electronic key present.
An attempt was made to exit the
vehicle with the electronic key and
lock the doors without first turning
the engine switch off when the shift
lever was in P.
 Turn the engine switch off and
lock the doors again.
(Flashes)
The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other
than the driver’s door was opened
and closed while the engine switch
was in a mode other than off.
 Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
Once
3 times
(Flashes)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
The driver’s door was opened and
closed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle, the shift lever was
in P and the engine switch was not
turned off.
 Turn the engine switch off.
 Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
9 times
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message

(Flashes)

Continuous
(Flashes)
Once
Continuous
(Flashes)
Once
Once
Details/Actions
An attempt was made to drive when
the electronic key was not inside the
vehicle.
 Confirm that the electronic key
is inside the vehicle.
An attempt was made to lock the
doors using the smart access system
with push-button start while the
electronic key was still inside the
vehicle.
 Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.
An attempt was made to lock either
front door by opening a door and
putting the inside lock button into
the lock position, then closing the
door with the electronic key still
inside the vehicle.
 Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.
The electronic key has a low battery.
 Replace the electronic key battery. (P. 450)

The steering lock could not be
released within 3 seconds of the
engine switch being pressed.
 Press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal and
moving the steering wheel left
and right.
Indicates a malfunction in the smart
access system with push-button
start
 Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

(Flashes)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises

(Flashes)
Once
493
494
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message

(Flashes)
Once

Once
Details/Actions
• When the doors were unlocked
with the mechanical key and then
the engine switch was pressed,
the electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
• The electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle even after
the engine switch was pressed
two consecutive times.
 Touch the electronic key to the
engine switch while depressing
the brake pedal.

During an engine starting procedure in the event that the electronic
key was not functioning properly
(P. 510), the engine switch was
touched with the electronic key.
 Press the engine switch within
10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.

Indicates that:
• With the engine switch off, the
doors were unlocked and then the
driver's door was opened and
closed
• The engine switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode without
starting the engine
• The shift lever was shifted to P or
N from another shift position with
the engine switch in IGNITION
ON mode.
 Press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal.

The engine switch has been turned
off with the shift lever in a position
other than P or N.
 Shift the shift lever to P.
(Flashes)
Once

(Flashes)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
After the engine switch has been
turned off with the shift lever in a
position other than P, the shift lever
has been shifted to P.
 Turn the engine switch off.
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer

Continuous
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
Details/Actions

Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function.
 Next time when starting the
engine, increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that
level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.

Indicates that the engine was
stopped in an emergency while driving
 To restart the engine, shift the
shift lever to N and turn the
engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.*
(Flashes)
Once
495

(Flashes)
Indicates that the engine switch has
been pressed while driving
 Except when emergency stopping of the vehicle is needed,
immediately release the engine
switch.
*: The engine may not be restarted depending on the vehicle condition.
■ Warning messages
P. 491
■ Warning buzzer
P. 479
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
496
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with
the spare tire.
For details about tires: P. 434
CAUTION
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond
repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 466)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
497
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
1
Jack handle
4
Towing eyelet
2
Screwdriver
5
Spare tire
3
Wheel nut wrench
6
Jack
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
498
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading
to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on
this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there
are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
499
Taking out the jack and jack handle
1
Remove the luggage mat.
2
Take out the jack handle from the
reverse side of the luggage mat.
Remove the spacer.
3
Take out the jack.
1
For tightening
2
For loosening
If the jack is too tightly installed to be
removed by hand, insert a tool, such
as the screwdriver included with the
vehicle, into the hole of the jack (portion “A”) and loosen the jack.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
500
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
1
Remove the luggage mat.
2
Remove the spacer and tool tray.
3
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
If the center fastener cannot be turned
by hand, use the wheel nut wrench that
is stored in the trunk. (To secure the tire,
tighten the center fastener by hand. Do
not use the wrench or other tools.)
CAUTION
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body
of the vehicle.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
501
Replacing a flat tire
1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Front
Rear
Wheel chock positions
Left-hand side
Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Left-hand side
In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
In front of the front left-hand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
3
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand
until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
2
502
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will
be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while
changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire
to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to
bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for
that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes
of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
503
Installing the spare tire
1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen
while the vehicle is in motion, causing
the tire to come off.
2
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
When replacing an aluminum wheel
with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel
nuts until the tapered portion comes
into loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
3
Lower the vehicle.
8
Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or
three times in the order shown in the
illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
4
504
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the
tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 534)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure
warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
■ When the compact spare tire is equipped
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when
driving with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with front and
rear tires of the same size)
Install the compact spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:
1 Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
505
CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with
your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations
that cause sudden engine braking.
■ When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not
operate correctly:
• Adaptive Variable Suspension System
(if equipped)
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
(if equipped)
• VGRS (if equipped)
• Rear view monitor system
(if equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may even negatively
affect the drive-train components:
• AWD system
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.
•
•
•
•
•
ABS & Brake assist
VSC
TRAC
Cruise control (if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise control
(if equipped)
• PCS (if equipped)
• EPS
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
may be damaged if not handled correctly.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
NOTICE
8
506
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being
followed (P. 164), consider each of the following points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(P. 164)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 69)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights
are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 512)
The starter motor does not turn over
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem
such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (P. 507)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
507
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights
do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 512)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures
are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim
measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally:
1
Set the parking brake.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4
Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the
brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
508
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the
shift lever can be shifted:
1
Set the parking brake.
2
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
3
Depress the brake pedal.
4
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
5
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
509
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P.
118) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the
smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the engine
can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked
functions
■ Doors
Use the mechanical key (P. 101) in
order to perform the following operations:
1
Locks all the doors
2
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
3
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key once
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
4
Opens the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)*
*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ Trunk
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
Turn the mechanical key clockwise
to open.
510
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine
1
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
2
Touch the Lexus emblem side of the
electronic key to the engine switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a
buzzer sounds and the engine switch
will turn to IGNITION ON mode.
When the smart access system with
push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will
turn to ACCESSORY mode.
3
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that
is shown on the multi-
information display.
4
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
511
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping
the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic
key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 450)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step 3 above.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed.
(P. 165)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features P. 552)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 117)
CAUTION
■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof
Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or
moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
512
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt
battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
1
Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors
locked. (P. 72)
2
Open the hood (P. 421)
3
IS350/IS300: Remove the engine cover.
Raise the rear of the engine cover to
remove the rear clip, and then raise
the front of the engine cover to
remove the two front clips.
4

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
IS350/IS300
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

513
IS200t
1
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal
on your vehicle.
2
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+)
battery terminal on the second vehicle.
3
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the
second vehicle.
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any moving parts,
as shown in the illustration.
5
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of
your vehicle.
6
Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.
7
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your
vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
8
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact
reverse order from which they were connected.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
When trouble arises
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
8
514
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low
speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not
in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If
the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be
unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
■ When recharging or replacing the battery
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system
with push-button start when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control
or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will
start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged.
Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be
especially careful when reconnecting the battery.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
515
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas
that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come
into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or
unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each
other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling
the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow
any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately
wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the
cooling fans or engine drive belt.
516
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 81) enters the red
zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle
speed does not increase.)
● “Engine Coolant High Temperature” is shown on the multi-information display.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and
then stop the engine.
2
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3
After the engine has cooled down
sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
1
Radiator
2
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
517
Engine coolant reservoir:
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on
the reservoir.

IS350/IS300
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL” line
3
“LOW” line

IS200t
Intercooler coolant reservoir (IS200t only):
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
1
Reservoir cap
2
“F” line
3
“L” line
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
518
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
5
Add coolant if necessary.

Engine (IS350/IS300)

Intercooler (IS200t only)

Engine (IS200t)
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.
6
Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or
hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow.
If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
7
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
8
Check if “Engine Coolant High Temperature” is shown on the multi-information display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the engine and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
519
CAUTION
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam
has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and
belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● IS350/IS300: Do not loosen the coolant res-
ervoir caps or radiator cap while the engine
and radiator are hot. (The radiator cap is
located under the engine cover.)
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
● IS200t: Do not loosen the coolant reservoir
cap or intercooler reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8
When trouble arises
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant
to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
520
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
2
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
3
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction.
4
Restart the engine.
5
Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press
to turn off TRAC.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
521
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding
area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also
lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than nec-
essary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle
may require towing to be freed.
8
When trouble arises
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
522
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
523
Vehicle specifications
9
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)................... 524
Fuel information.......................... 537
Tire information...........................540
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ............ 552
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize...........................561
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
524
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
183.7 in. (4665 mm)
Overall width
Overall height*
71.3 in. (1810 mm)
1
56.3 in. (1430 mm)
Wheelbase
Tread*
110.2 in. (2800 mm)
Front
60.4 in. (1535 mm)
Rear
61.0 in. (1550 mm)
60.6 in. (1540 mm)*2
1
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + lug- 825 lb. (375 kg)
gage)
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: Vehicles with 255/35R18 tires
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
525
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top
left of the instrument panel and in the
engine compartment.

IS350/IS300

IS200t
This number is also on the Certification Label.
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
526
9-1. Specifications
■ Engine number

IS350/IS300

IS200t
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
Engine
IS350/IS300
IS200t
Model
3.5 L 6-cylinder (2GR-FSE) 2.0 L 4-cylinder (8AR-FTS)
engine
engine
Type
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
4-cylinder in line,
4-cycle, gasoline
(with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke
3.70  3.27 in.
(94.0  83.0 mm)
3.39  3.39 in.
(86.0  86.0 mm)
Displacement
210.9 cu. in. (3456 cm3)
121.9 cu. in. (1998 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating
91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp. gal.)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
527
Lubrication system
■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference*])
IS350 (2WD)
IS350/IS300
(AWD)
IS200t
With filter
6.6 qt.
(6.2 L, 5.5 Imp. qt.)
6.8 qt.
(6.4 L, 5.6 Imp. qt.)
4.9 qt.
(4.6 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.)
Without filter
6.2 qt.
(5.9 L, 5.2 Imp. qt.)
6.3 qt.
(6.0 L, 5.3 Imp. qt.)
4.5 qt.
(4.3 L, 3.8 Imp. qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine
oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level
on the dipstick.
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
528
9-1. Specifications
■ Engine oil selection (IS350/IS300)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it
must be replaced with SAE 0W-20
at the next oil change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification
Advisory
Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added
to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
529
■ Engine oil selection (IS200t)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil SAE 0W-20 for Direct Injection Turbo Gasoline
Engines” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil SAE 0W-20 for Direct Injection Turbo Gasoline Engines” or
equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil SAE 0W-20 for Direct Injection Turbo
Gasoline Engines” or ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it
must be replaced with SAE 0W-20
at the next oil change.
Outside temperature
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
530
9-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
531
Cooling system
IS350/IS300 10.1 qt. (9.6 L, 8.4 Imp. qt.)
Capacity
Engine
8.2 qt. (7.8 L, 6.9 Imp. qt.)
 Intercooler
3.2 qt. (3.0 L, 2.6 Imp. qt.)

IS200t
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Coolant type
Ignition system
■ Spark plug
IS350/IS300
IS200t
Make
DENSO FK20HBR11
NGK DILFR7K9G
Gap
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
0.035 in. (0.9 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system
Battery
Charging rates
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
5 A max.
9
Vehicle specifications
Open voltage at 68F 12.6  12.8 V Fully charged
(20C):
12.2  12.4 V Half charged
11.8  12.0 V Discharged
(Check the voltage 20 minutes after the engine and all
lights are turned off.)
532
9-1. Specifications
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity*
IS350 (2WD)
10.0 qt. (9.5 L, 8.4 Imp. qt.)
IS350/IS300
(AWD)
10.6 qt. (10.0 L, 8.8 Imp. qt.)
IS200t
9.5 qt. (9.0 L, 7.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration
in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Front differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.61 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above 0F (-18C): SAE90
Below 0F (-18C): SAE80W or SAE80W-90
Rear differential
Oil capacity
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further
details.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
533
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1
2WD
4.2 in. (107 mm) Min.
AWD
4.7 in. (118 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04 — 0.08 in. (1.0 — 2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel*2
7  10 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N, 51.0 kgf)
while the engine is running.
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf)
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
534
9-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels

Type A
Tire size
225/45R17 91W, T125/70D17 98M (spare)
Front:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
Tire inflation pressure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Driving
at high speeds (above 118 mph [190 km/h]) (in
inflation pressure)
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17  7 1/2J, 17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Type B
Tire size
225/45R17 91V, T125/70D17 98M (spare)
Front:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
Tire inflation pressure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Driving
at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in
inflation pressure)
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17  7 1/2J, 17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications

535
Type C
Tire size
225/40R18 88Y, 255/35R18 90Y,
T125/70D17 98M (spare)
Front:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
Tire inflation pressure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Driving at high speeds (above 137 mph [220 km/h]) (in
inflation pressure)
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 2 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
18  8J (225/40R18), 18  8 1/2J (255/35R18),
17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Type D
Tire size
225/40R18 88W, 255/35R18 90W,
T125/70D17 98M (spare)
Front:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
Tire inflation pressure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Driving at high speeds (above 118 mph [190 km/h]) (in
inflation pressure)
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
18  8J (225/40R18), 18  8 1/2J (255/35R18),
17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9
Vehicle specifications
Wheel size
536
9-1. Specifications
Light bulbs*1
Light bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type

35
A
Front turn signal lights
7444NA
28/8
B
Rear turn signal lights

21
B
Back-up lights
921
16
C
Outer foot lights

5
C
Door courtesy lights
168
5
C
Vanity lights

8
C
Interior light

8
C
Personal lights

8
C
Footwell lights
194
3.8
C
Trunk light

5
C
Discharge headlights*2
Exterior
Interior
A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
*1: Light bulbs not listed in this table are LED bulbs.
*2: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
537
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline.

IS350/IS300
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research
Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If
91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage
and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

IS200t
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research
Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If
91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Persistent
knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling
with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A..
■ Gasoline quality
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9
Vehicle specifications
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are
using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not
correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected
to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In
the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves
customer satisfaction through better performance.
538
9-1. Specifications
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the
build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more informa-
tion on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official
website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low emission gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated
gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethaDO NOT use gasoline connol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that taining more than 15% ethanol.
could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85
(30% ethanol)
(which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
539
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
540
9-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire

Compact spare tire
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
1
Tire size
2
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
541
(P. 543)
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire
has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
3
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply
tire.
4
Summer tires or all season tires
(P. 438)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer
tire.
5
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(P. 547)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
6
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
7
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 547)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the
plies in a tire.
8
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
9
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(P. 542)
10
Location of treadwear indicators
(P. 434)
11
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded
on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
542
9-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
1
DOT symbol*
2
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3
Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4
Tire size code
5
Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6
Manufacturing week
7
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
543
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1
Tire use (P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
2
Section width (millimeters)
3
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
4
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
5
Wheel diameter (inches)
6
Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)
7
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
1
Section width
2
Tire height
3
Wheel diameter
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
544
9-1. Specifications
Tire section names
1
Bead
2
Sidewall
3
Shoulder
4
Tread
5
Belt
6
Inner liner
7
Reinforcing rubber
8
Carcass
9
Rim lines
10
Bead wires
11
Chafer
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
545
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.
Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
546
9-1. Specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and
not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
547
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Cold tire inflation pressure
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1
mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may
sure
be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended
pressure
inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items
which may be replaced) of automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment,
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,
and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional
weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle (b) Accessory weight
weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified
in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the
third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9
Vehicle specifications
Normal occupant weight
548
9-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg)
(Total load capacity)
times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
load on an individual tire that is determined by disVehicle maximum load on The
tributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded
the tire
vehicle weight, and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by disVehicle normal load on the tributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory
weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in
tire
accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated
tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped
or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the
rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in the
bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less
than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
Tire related term
549
Meaning
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on
the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the
rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher
inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire
that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible infla- The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may
tion pressure
be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9
Vehicle specifications
Measuring rim
550
9-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric
and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher
inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method
for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on
Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked
with an Alpine Symbol (
) on at least one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
9-1. Specifications
Tire related term
551
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
The projections within the principal grooves designed
Treadwear indicators (TWI) to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the
tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capac- Vehicle normal load, Numity, Number of occupants
ber of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1
in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20
7
2 in front, 2 in second seat,
2 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
552
9-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized
to your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by using
the meter control switches, the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller or at your Lexus dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
■ Changing by using the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller

Vehicles with a Remote Touch
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
2
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen and select “Vehicle”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be
changed for details.
For details on the Remote Touch, refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio controller
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
2
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen and select “Vehicle”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be
changed for details.
■ Changing by using the meter control switches
P. 87
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
553
9-2. Customization
Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being
customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
1
Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio
controller
2
Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches
3
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P. 76, 81, 86)
Function*1
Language
Default setting
English
Customized setting
French
Spanish
1
2
3
O O —
km (km/L)
Units*2
miles (MPG US)
km (L/100 km)
— O —
miles (MPG Imperial)
Eco Driving Indicator Light
switch settings *3
Drive information 1
ON (Self-lighting)
OFF
— O —
Drive information 1
Desired status
screen*4
— O —
*5
— O —
*5
— O —
ON
OFF
— O —
Color 1
Color 2
Current fuel economy
Average fuel economy (after reset)
Distance (range)
Drive information 2
Accent color*3
Needle*6
Blue
Speed indicator*6
OFF
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Red
White
O O —
— O —
30 to 100 mph (50
— O —
to 160 km/h)
9
Vehicle specifications
Pop-up display
Average speed
(after reset)
554
9-2. Customization
Function*1
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
2000 to 6600
rpm*7
REV indicator*6
5000 rpm
2000 to 6100
rpm*8
— O —
OFF
REV peak*6
ON
OFF
— O —
*1: For details about each function: P. 89
*2: The default setting varies according to country.
*3: Except F SPORT models
*4: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on multi-information display).
*5: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),
average fuel economy (after start), average fuel economy (after refuel), average vehicle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), elapsed time (after reset),
elapsed time (after start), distance (driving range), distance (after start), blank.
*6: F SPORT models
*7: IS350/IS300
*8: IS200t
■ Door lock (P. 105, 111, 509)
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
Unlocking using a mechanical key
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked
in one step
—
— O
Automatic door lock
Shifting the shift
lever to position
other than P
Automatic door unlock
Shifting the shift
lever to P
3
Off
Locking/unlocking of the
trunk when all doors are
locked/unlocked
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
On
Vehicle speed is
approximately 12
mph (20 km/h) or
higher
O — O
Off
Driver’s door is
opened
Off
O — O
—
— O
555
9-2. Customization
■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control
(P. 105, 111)
Function
Operation buzzer volume
Operation signal (Emergency flashers)
Default setting
5
On
Customized setting
Off
1 to 7
Off
1
2
3
O — O
O — O
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened
after
being
unlocked
Off
60 seconds
Open door warning buzzer
On
Off
—
— O
Welcome light illumination
control
On
Off
—
— O
30 seconds
O — O
120 seconds
■ Smart access system with push-button start (P. 105, 111, 116)
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
Smart access system with
push-button start
On
Off
—
— O
Driver’s door
All the doors
Smart door unlocking
Number of consecutive
door lock operations
2 times
3
O — O
As many as desired —
— O
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
556
9-2. Customization
■ Wireless remote control (P. 100, 105, 111)
Function
Wireless remote control
Unlocking operation
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
On
Off
—
— O
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
3
All doors unlocked
O — O
in one step
One short press
Trunk unlocking operation
Press and hold
(short)
Push twice
—
— O
Off
—
— O
Customized setting
1
2
Press and hold
(long)
Off
Alarm (panic mode)
On
■ Driving position memory* (P. 126)
Function
Default setting
Driver’s seat movement
when exiting the vehicle
Standard
Doors linked to the driving
position memory recall
function
Driver’s door
All doors
—
— O
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
Mechanical key linked operation
Off
On
—
— O
Wireless remote control
linked operation
Off
On (Open only)
—
— O
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)
On
Off
—
— O
Off
Partial
3
O — O
*: If equipped
■ Power windows (P. 141)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
557
9-2. Customization
■ Moon roof* (P. 144)
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
Mechanical key linked operation
Off
On
—
— O
Linked operation of components when mechanical key
is used (open only)
Slide only
Tilt only
—
— O
Wireless remote control
linked operation
Off
On (Open only)
—
— O
Linked operation of components when wireless remote
control is used
Slide only
Tilt only
—
— O
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)
On
Off
—
— O
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
—
— O
3
*: If equipped
■ Turn signal lever (P. 175)
Function
The number of times the
turn signal lights flash automatically when the turn signal lever is moved to the first
position during a lane
change*1
3
5
3
7
Off*2
Off *3
*1: After flashing the turn signal lights when turning left or right while this function is off
and the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in the direction of the flashing
light, the turn signal lights can be selected to be flashing or off.
*2: The turn signal lights keep flashing if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position
in the direction of flashing light.
the direction of flashing light.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Vehicle specifications
*3: The turn signal lights will be off if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in
9
558
9-2. Customization
■ Automatic light control system (P. 178)
Function
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off
after doors are closed
Default setting
Customized setting
Standard
-2 to 2
1
2
3
O — O
Off
30 seconds
60 seconds
O — O
90 seconds
■ Lights (P. 178)
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
Daytime running light system*
On
Off
1
2
3
O — O
*: U.S.A. only
■ Intuitive parking assist*1 (P. 223)
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
Detection distance of the
front center sensor
Far
Near
O — O
Detection distance of the
rear center sensor
Far
Near
O — O
3
1 to 5
O — O
All sensors displayed
Display off
O — O
Buzzer volume
Display setting*2
1
2
3
*1: If equipped
*2: When intuitive parking assist is operating.
■ Automatic air conditioning system (P. 368)
Function
A/C Auto switch operation
Default setting
Customized setting
On
Off
Default setting
Customized setting
Off
On
1
2
3
O — O
■ Seat heaters* (P. 376)
Function
Seat heater timer control
*: If equipped
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
1
2
3
O — O
559
9-2. Customization
■ Illumination (P. 378)
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
Off
Time elapsed before the
interior lights turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
O — O
30 seconds
Operation after the engine
switch is turned off
On
Off
—
— O
Operation when the doors
are unlocked
On
Off
—
— O
Operation
when
you
approach the vehicle with
the electronic key on your
person
On
Off
—
— O
Inside door handle lights
On
Off
—
— O
Off
Time elapsed before the
outer foot lights turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
O — O
30 seconds
Operation of the outer foot
lights when you approach
the vehicle with the electronic key on your person
On
Off
—
— O
Operation of the outer foot
lights when the doors are
unlocked with the power
door lock switch
On
Off
—
— O
Function
Default setting
Customized setting
1
2
Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer
On
Off
—
— O
■ Seat belt reminder (P. 477)
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
3
560
9-2. Customization
■ Vehicle customization
● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the entry unlock function
cannot be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer activated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in accordance with the
operation buzzer volume and operational signal (Emergency flashers) function settings.
● Some settings can be changed using a switch or the audio system screen. If a setting is
changed using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the audio system
screen until the engine switch is turned off and then to IGNITION ON mode.
■ When customizing using the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also,
to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features.
CAUTION
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust
gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This
may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
561
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such
cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on
the vehicle:
Item
When to initialize
Message indicating mainte- • After the maintenance is pernance is required (U.S.A. only)
formed
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
Reference
P. 413, 427
P. 436
9
Vehicle specifications
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
562
9-3. Initialization
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
563
For owners
10
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners............................................564
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in French) ........565
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in French) ........566
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
564
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
565
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu’elle passe bien sur
l’épaule, sans pour autant être en
contact avec le cou ou glisser de
l’épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus
bas possible sur les hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus
droit possible et calez-vous bien
dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau savonneuse tiède.
Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées ou
exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
10
For owners
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N’utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de
sécurité défectueuse n’apporte aucune garantie de protection de l’occupant en cas
d’accident.
566
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in
English.
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
1
Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/le coussin gonflable du passager
avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs avec des éléments à l’intérieur
2
Les coussins gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
567
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideaux
3
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des passagers avant
Les coussins gonflables latéraux arrière SRS
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis aux places
arrière extérieures
4
Coussins gonflables SRS rideaux
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis
aux places extérieures
10
For owners
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
568
Composition du système d’airbags SRS
1
Système de classification de l’occupant du siège passager avant
(ECU et capteurs)
10
Témoin d’avertissement SRS
11
Coussin gonflable conducteur
12
Coussins
arrière
13
Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)
14
Capteur de position du siège conducteur
15
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture
de sécurité conducteur
gonflables
latéraux
2
Capteurs d’impact latéral (porte
avant)
3
Coussins gonflables de genoux
4
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
5
Coussins gonflables rideaux
6
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG
ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
16
Ensemble des capteurs du coussin
gonflable
7
Prétensionneurs de ceintures de
sécurité et limiteurs de force
17
8
Capteurs d’impact latéral (avant)
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture
de sécurité du siège passager
avant
9
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
18
Capteurs d’impact avant
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
569
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES DE POINTE, conçus
selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur
(FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) du coussin gonflable régule le
déploiement du coussin gonflable sur la base des informations qu’il reçoit des
capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du
système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité de l’impact et les informations
de l’occupant du siège. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une
réaction chimique dans les dispositifs de gonflage remplissent rapidement les
coussins gonflables avec un gaz non toxique permettant ainsi d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
10
For owners
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables SRS.
Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec les
ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable, et
peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le conducteur se trouve trop
proche du coussin gonflable. L’autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux
États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille:
Sachant que la zone à risque pour le coussin gonflable du conducteur se trouve dans
les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) du déploiement, placez-vous à 10 in. (250 mm)
de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est mesurée à partir de l’axe du volant et de votre sternum. Si
vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de
conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart des
conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le
siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre
siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre
véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d’orienter le
coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre
cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.
570
ATTENTION
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité
du siège avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS
frontaux détectent que le conducteur et le
passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de
sécurité, alors même que ce n’est pas le cas.
Dans ce cas, il se peut que les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux ne se déploient pas correctement en cas d’accident, ce qui peut
entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles en cas de collision. Veillez à porter la
ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une force con-
sidérable, ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles, surtout si le
passager avant se trouve trop proche du coussin gonflable. Éloignez du coussin gonflable le siège du passager avant au maximum et réglez le dossier de siège de façon à
ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement du coussin gonflable. Un
nourrisson ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité, doit être correctement attaché à l’aide d’un siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement d’installer tous les nourrissons et enfants dans les sièges arrière du véhicule et
correctement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les
enfants que le siège du passager avant.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
571
ATTENTION
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et
ne vous appuyez pas contre le tableau de
bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir debout
devant le coussin gonflable SRS passager
avant ou s’asseoir sur les genoux du passager
avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant
voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, contre
le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants
avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller sur les siè-
ges passagers en appui contre la porte ou
sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.
● Ne rien fixer ni ne disposer aucun objet sur
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
10
For owners
des emplacements tels que le tableau de
bord, la garniture du volant de direction et la
partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments peuvent être projetés lorsque
les coussins gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant et genoux se déploient.
572
ATTENTION
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre du pare-
brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant
et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée
d’assistance.
● Ne pas suspendre de cintres ou d’objet durs aux crochets à vêtements. Tous ces élé-
ments pourraient être projetés et provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si
les coussins gonflables SRS rideaux se déployaient.
● Si un couvercle en vinyle est posé sur la partie où le coussin gonflable SRS de genoux
se déploie, veillez à le retirer.
● N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège recouvrant les emplacements de déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux, car cela risquerait de gêner le déploiement des
coussins gonflables. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables
latéraux de fonctionner correctement, de désactiver le système ou d’entraîner le
déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, entraînant des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou de fortes pressions sur l’emplacement renfermant
les éléments des coussins gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait provoquer un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucunes des parties du système immédiatement après le déploiement
(gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être encore chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou bien descendez
du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible
afin d’éviter une irritation cutanée.
● Si les emplacements renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, tels que la garniture du
moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmés
ou craquelés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
● Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela
a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager, ce qui empêche le capteur de
détecter correctement le poids du passager. En conséquence, le coussin gonflable
SRS passager avant risque de ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
573
ATTENTION
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de coussin gonflable SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables SRS risquent
de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement,
provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de
bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garniture, des montants avant,
latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs de
l’habitacle
● Installation d'un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasseneige, de treuils
● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques, tels qu’une radio émetteur/récepteur ou un lecteur CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne
atteinte d’un handicap physique
10
For owners
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
574
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
575
Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).................................576
Alphabetical index................................ 580
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “NAVIGATION
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the
equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
• Intuitive parking assist
• Rear view monitor system
576
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus
dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made
by your Lexus dealer. (P. 102)
● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (P. 104)
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P. 450)
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (P. 165)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave.
(P. 118)
The rear door cannot be opened
● Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock.
(P. 108)
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will
operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk.
(P. 113)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
577
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
● Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(P. 164)
● Is the shift lever in P? (P. 166)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (P. 116)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 166)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (P. 510)
● Is the battery discharged? (P. 512)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake
pedal
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode. (P. 508)
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped
● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P. 166)
The windows do not open or close by operating the power window
switches
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated
if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 141)
The engine switch is turned off automatically
● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of
time. (P. 166)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
578
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (P. 477)
● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 177)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(P. 476, 482)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 71)
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
• Unlock the doors or open the trunk.
• Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start
the engine.
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (P. 482)
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to
P. 476, 482.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
579
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
(P. 496)
The vehicle becomes stuck
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
(P. 520)
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
580
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A
A/C............................................................368
Air conditioning filter....................... 448
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................................. 368
AAC disc .................................................306
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)....... 249
Function ..................................................249
Warning light .......................................476
Accent color..............................................89
Adaptive Variable
Suspension system ...........................250
Air conditioning filter..........................448
Air conditioning system.....................368
Air conditioning filter....................... 448
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................................. 368
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Airbags.........................................................36
Airbag operating conditions .......... 44
Airbag precautions
for your child ....................................... 39
Correct driving posture.................... 28
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ....................... 44
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ............................................ 41
Front passenger occupant
classification system..........................47
General airbag precautions ........... 39
Locations of airbags............................ 36
Modification and disposal
of airbags............................................... 43
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................................. 44
Side airbag precautions .................... 39
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions ....................... 44
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions ......................... 39
SRS airbags ............................................. 36
SRS warning light .............................. 476
Alphabetical index
Alarm..............................................................71
Anchor brackets......................................58
Antennas (smart access system
with push-button start)....................... 116
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)....... 249
Function ..................................................249
Warning light .......................................476
Approach warning (dynamic
radar cruise control)........................ 207
Armrest ....................................................389
Assist grip ..................................................391
Audio input..............................................284
Audio system.......................................... 276
Audio input............................................284
AUX port/USB port........................284
Bluetooth® audio.............................. 328
CD player............................................. 306
iPod.............................................................312
MP3/WMA/AAC disc ................ 306
Optimal use ..........................................293
Portable music player....................... 319
Radio .......................................................300
Steering wheel audio switch ......... 281
USB memory........................................ 315
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
581
Automatic headlight leveling
system...................................................... 179
Warning light........................................477
Automatic High Beam.......................... 181
Automatic light control
system......................................................178
Automatic transmission.......................169
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P........... 508
M mode.................................................... 172
Paddle shift switches............................171
AUX port ................................................ 284
Average fuel economy ..........................87
Average vehicle speed..........................87
582
Alphabetical index
B
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs........................462
Wattage................................................. 536
Battery.........................................................431
Battery checking ................................. 431
If the vehicle battery
is discharged...................................... 512
Preparing and checking before
winter....................................................270
Warning light .......................................476
Bluetooth®
Audio system ...................................... 328
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)....................... 330
Bottle holders.........................................383
Brake
Fluid.......................................................... 430
Parking brake.........................................177
Warning light .......................................476
Brake assist ............................................. 249
Break-in tips...............................................151
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control.........84
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)................ 262
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
C
Care................................................406, 409
Aluminum wheels..............................407
Exterior ...................................................406
Interior.....................................................409
Seat belts..................................................410
Cargo capacity ........................................ 161
Cargo hooks .......................................... 385
CD player................................................ 306
Chains......................................................... 271
Child restraint system ............................54
Booster seats, definition....................55
Booster seats, installation................. 64
Convertible seats, definition ...........55
Convertible seats, installation...........61
Front passenger occupant
classification system..........................47
Infant seats, definition..........................55
Infant seats, installation.........................61
Installing CRS
with LATCH anchors.....................59
Installing CRS with seat belts ...........61
Installing CRS
with top tether strap.........................65
Alphabetical index
Child safety ................................................ 53
Airbag precautions ..............................39
Battery precautions ............... 432, 515
Child restraint system.........................54
How your child should wear
the seat belt .......................................... 32
Installing child restraints.................... 58
Moon roof precautions.....................147
Power window lock switch.............. 141
Power window precautions .......... 143
Rear door child-protectors ...........108
Removed electronic
key battery precautions................ 451
Seat belt extender
precautions...........................................35
Seat belt precautions ..........................57
Seat heater precautions..................376
Trunk precautions................................. 114
Child-protectors.................................... 108
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
583
Cleaning .......................................406, 409
Aluminum wheels..............................407
Exterior ...................................................406
Interior.....................................................409
Seat belts..................................................410
Clock......................................................... 387
Coat hooks ...............................................391
Compass ..................................................397
Condenser...............................................429
Console box........................................... 382
Cooling system ..................................... 428
Engine overheating ............................516
Cruise control
Cruise control ...................................... 198
Dynamic radar cruise control ..... 202
Cup holders............................................ 383
Current fuel consumption....................87
Curtain shield airbags............................37
Customizable features ...................... 552
584
Alphabetical index
D
Daytime running light system............179
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors............. 372
Rear window ........................................372
Windshield ............................................ 372
Differential
Front differential..................................532
Rear differential...................................532
Dimension ............................................... 524
Dinghy towing..........................................163
Display
Drive information ..................................87
Dynamic radar cruise control......202
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)........ 218
Multi-information display ..................86
Warning message.............................482
Distance ......................................................88
Do-it-yourself maintenance...............419
Door courtesy lights
Location..................................................378
Wattage................................................. 536
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Doors ..........................................................105
Automatic door locking
and unlocking system................... 108
Door lock.................................................107
Open door warning buzzer ......... 106
Open door warning light ...............477
Outside rear view mirrors ............. 138
Rear door child-protector ............. 108
Side windows ..........................................141
Drive information .....................................87
Drive info 1/Drive info 2....................... 89
Driver’s seat position memory.......... 126
Driving ........................................................150
Break-in tips............................................ 151
Correct driving posture.................... 28
Driving mode select switch.......... 246
Procedures............................................ 150
Winter drive tips ................................ 270
Dynamic radar cruise control......... 202
Alphabetical index
E
E-mail.........................................................338
Eco drive mode..................................... 246
Eco Driving Indicator...............................91
Eco Driving Indicator Light.................89
EDR (Event data recorder)...................10
Elapsed time .............................................. 87
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .......250
Function ................................................. 250
Warning light ....................................... 477
Electronic key ......................................... 100
Battery-saving function...................... 117
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................509
Replacing the battery...................... 450
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
585
Emergency, in case of
If a warning message
is displayed........................................482
If the electronic key
does not operate properly....... 509
If the engine will not start .............. 506
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P........... 508
If the vehicle battery is
discharged...........................................512
If the warning buzzer
sounds ................................................. 476
If the warning light turns on .......... 476
If you have a flat tire..........................496
If you think something
is wrong .............................................. 474
If your vehicle becomes
stuck......................................................520
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.......... 467
If your vehicle needs
to be towed.......................................468
If your vehicle overheats..................516
586
Alphabetical index
Emergency flashers............................. 466
Engine ....................................................... 526
ACCESSORY mode....................... 165
Compartment......................................423
Engine switch........................................ 164
Hood ..........................................................421
How to start the engine ................... 164
Identification number .......................526
If the engine will not start...............506
Ignition switch (engine switch)..... 164
Overheating ..........................................516
Engine coolant.......................................428
Capacity .................................................. 531
Checking................................................428
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................270
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ..........................................................81
Engine immobilizer system ................. 69
Engine oil ................................................. 425
Capacity .................................................527
Checking................................................425
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................270
Engine oil maintenance data ............427
Engine switch ...........................................164
Enhanced VSC ..................................... 249
EPS
(Electronic Power Steering) ........250
Function ................................................. 250
Warning light ....................................... 477
Event data recorder (EDR)...................10
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
F
First-aid kit storage belt..................... 385
Flat tire.......................................................496
Floor mats....................................................26
Fluid
Automatic transmission.................. 532
Brake........................................................533
Washer...................................................433
Fog lights....................................................186
Replacing light bulbs .......................463
Switch ....................................................... 186
Wattage .................................................536
Footwell light.......................................... 378
Wattage .................................................536
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............................47
Front personal lights ............................379
Wattage .................................................536
Front seats................................................. 123
Adjustment..............................................123
Cleaning.................................................409
Correct driving posture.................... 28
Driving position memory.................126
Head restraints .......................................131
Power easy access system.............126
Seat heaters...........................................377
Seat position memory .......................126
Seat ventilators.....................................377
Alphabetical index
Front turn signal lights ..........................175
Replacing light bulbs........... 457, 459
Turn signal lever .................................. 175
Wattage................................................. 536
Fuel ...............................................................194
Capacity .................................................526
Fuel gauge................................................. 81
Fuel pump shut off system.............475
Information ............................................537
Refueling.................................................. 194
Type ...............................................194, 526
Warning light ....................................... 477
Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy ......................87
Current fuel consumption................87
Fuel filler door..........................................194
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened .......................... 196
Refueling.................................................. 194
Fuel gauge....................................................81
Fuel pump shut off system................. 475
Fuses .......................................................... 452
G
Garage door opener.......................... 392
Gauges..........................................................81
Gear positions .........................................173
Glove box................................................382
Glove box light......................................382
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
587
H
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)........................... 330
HD Radio® system..............................300
Head restraints......................................... 131
Headlights.................................................178
Discharge headlights
precautions .......................................464
Light switch.............................................178
Replacing light bulbs .......................463
Wattage .................................................536
Headlights cleaner ................................187
Heaters
Air conditioning system .................368
Heated steering wheel ................... 376
Outside rear view mirrors .............372
Seat heaters...........................................377
Hill-start assist control ........................249
Hood ........................................................... 421
Open .........................................................421
Hooks
Cargo hooks .......................................385
Coat hooks.............................................391
Retaining hooks (floor mat)............. 26
Horn.............................................................135
588
Alphabetical index
I
I/M test ...................................................... 418
Identification
Engine......................................................526
Vehicle ................................................... 525
Ignition switch (engine switch)..........164
Illuminated entry system.................... 379
Immobilizer system................................. 69
Indicators .................................................... 78
Initialization
Engine oil maintenance data........ 427
Maintenance.......................................... 413
Moon roof .............................................. 146
Multi-information display ..................89
Power windows....................................142
Tire pressure
warning system................................435
Initiators (tire pressure
warning system)...................................441
Inside door handle lights ................... 378
Inside rear view mirror.........................136
Instrument panel light control ............ 84
Intercooler............................................... 429
Intercooler coolant ..............................428
Capacity .................................................. 531
Checking................................................428
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................270
Interior lights........................................... 379
Wattage................................................. 536
Intuitive parking assist......................... 223
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack.................... 422
Vehicle-equipped jack................... 497
Jack handle ................................................. 497
Jam protection function
Moon roof...............................................145
Power windows....................................142
K
Keyless entry
Smart access system
with push-button start............ 105, 111
Wireless remote control.......... 105, 111
Keys ............................................................ 100
Battery-saving function ......................117
Electronic key....................................... 100
Engine switch ........................................164
If the electronic key
does not operate properly....... 509
Key number plate............................... 100
Keyless entry......................................... 100
Mechanical key...................................... 101
Replacing the battery ......................450
Warning buzzer.................................. 106
Wireless remote control................. 100
Knee airbags ..............................................36
Alphabetical index
L
Lane Departure Alert (LDA) ............217
Language
(multi-information display)...............89
LATCH anchors ...................................... 59
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ............217
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever ...........................421
Hood lock release lever...................421
Internal trunk release lever............... 113
Shift lever................................................. 169
Tilt and telescopic steering
lock release lever............................. 134
Turn signal lever .................................. 175
Wiper lever............................................ 187
Lexus Display Audio controller...... 278
Lexus Display Audio system............ 276
Lexus Enform*
Lexus Enform Remote* ....................365
Lexus Enform Safety Connect........400
Lexus parking assist monitor* ........230
License plate lights.................................178
Light switch ............................................ 178
Replacing light bulbs........................463
589
Light bulbs
Replacing............................................... 457
Wattage .................................................536
Lights
Fog light switch.................................... 186
Headlight switch ..................................178
Illuminated entry system................. 379
Interior light........................................... 379
Interior lights list..................................378
Personal lights..................................... 379
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 457
Trunk light..................................................113
Turn signal lever...................................175
Vanity lights..........................................387
Wattage .................................................536
Lock steering column...........................166
Low profile tire ...................................... 438
Luggage security system ......................112
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
590
Alphabetical index
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance........... 419
General maintenance ...................... 415
Maintenance data..............................524
Maintenance requirements.............412
Maintenance system..............................89
Malfunction indicator lamp .............. 476
Master warning light ............................477
Meter
Changing the display..........................83
Indicators...................................................78
Instrument panel light control.........84
Meters.......................................................... 81
Multi-information display ..................86
Warning lights ........................................ 77
Micro dust and pollen filter ................371
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..................... 136
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers........................................... 372
Outside rear view mirrors..............138
Vanity mirrors......................................387
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
MMS (Multimedia messaging
service).................................................. 338
Mobile Assistant................................... 282
Moon roof ................................................. 144
Door lock linked
moon roof operation......................145
Jam protection function....................145
Operation................................................144
MP3 disc ................................................. 306
Multi-information display..................... 86
Audio system-linked...........................86
Drive information.................................. 87
Dynamic radar cruise control ..... 202
LDA (Lane Departure Alert).........218
Navigation system-linked ................86
Settings ......................................................89
Switching the display .......................... 87
Warning message.............................482
N
Navigation system*
Needle......................................................... 89
Noise from under vehicle........................8
Alphabetical index
O
Odometer ....................................................81
Oil
Engine oil................................................527
Front differential oil............................532
Rear differential oil.............................532
Opener
Hood ..........................................................421
Trunk .............................................................111
Outer foot lights
Location..................................................378
Replacing light bulbs........................463
Wattage................................................. 536
Outside rear view mirrors ................. 138
Adjusting and folding........................138
Blind spot monitor.............................262
Linked mirror function
when reversing................................. 139
Mirror position memory.................. 126
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers............................372
Outside temperature...............................81
Overheating, Engine ............................516
591
P
Paddle shift switches...............................171
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist)...................223
Parking brake .......................................... 177
Parking lights ...........................................178
Light switch.............................................178
Replacing light bulbs .......................463
PCS (Pre-Collision System)............ 255
Function..................................................255
PCS OFF switch................................256
Warning light........................................477
Personal lights ........................................379
Wattage .................................................536
Pop-up display ......................................... 89
Power easy access system................. 126
Power outlet...........................................388
Power steering (Electric power
steering system) ................................ 250
Warning light........................................477
Power windows.........................................141
Door lock linked
window operation ...........................143
Jam protection function....................142
Operation..................................................141
Window lock switch ............................141
Pre-Collision System (PCS)............ 255
Function..................................................255
PCS OFF switch................................256
Warning light........................................477
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
592
Alphabetical index
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control)........................ 202
Radiator.................................................... 429
Radio..........................................................300
Rear personal lights............................. 379
Wattage................................................. 536
Rear seats ..................................................124
Fold down the seatback ...................124
Luggage security system.................. 112
Rear sunshade .......................................389
Operation............................................. 389
Reverse operation feature............ 389
Rear turn signal lights ...........................175
Replacing light bulbs....................... 460
Turn signal lever .................................. 175
Wattage................................................. 536
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror..................... 136
Outside rear view mirrors..............138
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Rear window defoggers.....................372
Refueling....................................................194
Capacity.................................................526
Fuel types...............................................526
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened...........................196
Opening the fuel tank cap ..............196
Remote Touch*
Replacing
Electronic key battery .....................450
Fuses ........................................................ 452
Light bulbs.............................................455
Tires..........................................................496
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners .................................. 564
Reset the maintenance data..............413
Rev indicator............................................. 89
Rev peak ..................................................... 89
Alphabetical index
S
Seat belt reminder light.......................477
Seat belts.....................................................30
Adjusting the seat belt..........................31
Automatic Locking Retractor......... 32
Child restraint system
installation................................................61
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt ........................................ 410
Emergency Locking
Retractor................................................ 32
How to wear your seat belt .............30
How your child should wear
the seat belt .......................................... 32
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use..........................................33
Reminder light and buzzer ........... 477
Seat belt extender................................. 32
Seat belt pretensioners ........................31
SRS warning light...............................476
Seat heaters .............................................377
Seat position memory...........................126
Seat ventilators.......................................377
Seating capacity....................................... 161
593
Seats, Front...............................................123
Adjustment..............................................123
Adjustment precautions...................123
Child seats/child restraint
system installation .............................58
Cleaning.................................................409
Driving position memory.................126
Head restraints .......................................131
Power easy access system.............126
Properly sitting in the seat................ 28
Seat heaters...........................................377
Seat position memory .......................126
Seat ventilators.....................................377
Seats, Rear ................................................ 124
Fold down the seatback...................124
Luggage security system...................112
Sensor
Automatic headlight system ..........179
Automatic High Beam system .... 185
Inside rear view mirror......................137
Intuitive parking assist...................... 223
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)......... 217
Radar sensor................. 210, 256, 264
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers.....................................................193
Service reminder indicators ................76
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
594
Alphabetical index
Shift lever ...................................................169
Automatic transmission ................... 169
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P ...........508
Shift lock system....................................508
Shift position and gear position ...........81
Side airbags ............................................... 37
Side marker lights...................................178
Light switch ............................................ 178
Replacing light bulbs........................463
Side mirrors ............................................. 138
Adjusting and folding........................138
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)............262
Linked mirror function
when reversing................................. 139
Mirror position memory.................. 126
Side turn signal lights ............................175
Replacing light bulbs........................463
Turn signal lever .................................. 175
Side windows ............................................ 141
Slip indicator............................................477
Smart access system
with push-button start ........................ 116
Antenna location...................................116
Entry functions...............................105, 111
Starting the engine ............................. 164
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
SMS (Short message service) ........ 338
Snow mode...............................................170
Snow tires.................................................272
Spare tire ..................................................496
Inflation pressure................................534
Storage location................................. 497
Spark plug .................................................531
Specifications..........................................524
Speedometer..............................................81
Speed indicator........................................ 89
Steering lock ............................................166
Column lock release .........................166
Steering wheel ........................................134
Adjustment..............................................134
Audio switches .....................................281
Heated steering wheel ................... 376
Power easy access system.............126
Steering wheel
position memory ..............................126
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................463
Storage feature.......................................381
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck........520
Sun visors................................................. 387
Alphabetical index
Sun shade
Rear.......................................................... 389
Roof............................................................ 145
switch settings...................................89
Switches
Audio remote control
switches................................................ 281
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
switch....................................................262
Cruise control switch........................198
Door lock switches ............................ 107
Driving mode select switch ..........246
Driving position memory
switches................................................ 126
Dynamic radar cruise
control switch...................................202
Emergency flashers switch .......... 466
Engine switch........................................ 164
Fog light switch ....................................186
Garage door opener
switches...............................................392
Heated steering wheel
switch....................................................376
Ignition switch ....................................... 164
Intuitive parking assist......................223
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
switch..................................................... 218
Light switches ....................................... 178
Meter control switches ......................87
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
595
Moon roof switches ...........................144
Outside rear view mirror
switches ............................................... 138
Paddle shift switches............................171
PCS OFF switch................................256
Power door lock switch...................107
Power window switches....................141
Rear sunshade switch .....................389
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers
switch ....................................................372
Seat heater switches .........................377
Seat ventilator switches...................377
Snow mode switch .............................170
Steering wheel switch ........................ 87
“SOS” button ...................................... 400
Talk switch.............................................340
Telephone switches..........................340
Tilt and telescopic
steering control switch..................134
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ...................................................436
Trunk opener main switch ................112
Trunk opener switch............................. 111
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button...................................................206
VSC OFF switch.................................251
Window lock switch ............................141
Windshield wiper
and washer switch...........................187
596
Alphabetical index
T
Tachometer .................................................81
Tail lights.....................................................178
Light switch ............................................ 178
Replacing light bulbs........................463
Talk switch* ............................................340
Telephone switches* ..........................340
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.............................................................71
Engine immobilizer system..............69
Luggage security system.................. 112
Theft prevention labels....................... 73
Tire inflation pressure ......................... 443
Maintenance data..............................534
Tire inflation pressure display
function................................................435
Warning light .......................................478
Tire information.....................................540
Glossary.................................................547
Size............................................................543
Tire identification number..............542
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................. 545
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Tire pressure warning system......... 435
Function..................................................435
Initializing ...............................................435
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters................435
Registering ID codes....................... 437
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ...................................................436
Warning light.......................................478
Tires ............................................................434
Chains....................................................... 271
Checking ............................................... 434
If you have a flat tire..........................496
Inflation pressure................................534
Information............................................540
Replacing...............................................496
Rotating tires........................................ 434
Size ...........................................................534
Snow tires...............................................272
Spare tire................................................496
Tire inflation pressure display
function................................................435
Tire pressure warning system.....435
Warning light.......................................478
Alphabetical index
Tools........................................................... 497
Top tether strap........................................ 65
Total load capacity.................................. 161
Towing
Dinghy towing ...................................... 163
Emergency towing........................... 468
Towing eyelet.........................................471
Trailer towing ........................................ 162
TRAC (Traction Control) ................. 249
Transmission.............................................169
Automatic transmission ................... 169
Driving mode select switch ..........246
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................................508
M mode ....................................................172
Paddle shift switches ........................... 171
Trip meters ...................................................81
597
Trunk ..............................................................111
Internal trunk release lever ...............113
Luggage security system...................112
Smart access system
with push-button start....................... 111
Trunk features......................................385
Trunk handle ............................................112
Trunk light..................................................113
Trunk opener main switch ................112
Trunk opener switch............................. 111
Wireless remote control..................... 111
Trunk light................................................... 113
Wattage .................................................536
Turn signal lights..................................... 175
Replacing light
bulbs ................457, 459, 460, 463
Turn signal lever...................................175
Wattage .................................................536
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
598
Alphabetical index
U
Units..............................................................89
USB device ...................................315, 358
Connecting...........................................284
USB audio.............................................. 315
USB photo ........................................... 358
USB port ..................................................284
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights ..........................................387
Wattage................................................. 536
Vanity mirrors ........................................ 387
Variable Gear Ratio Steering
(VGRS) ................................................. 249
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics
Integrated Management)..............250
Vehicle data recordings .......................... 9
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated
Management (VDIM).....................250
Vehicle identification number.........525
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC)..................................................... 249
Ventilators (seat ventilators).............377
VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio
Steering) ............................................... 249
Voice command system......................361
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control) ............ 249
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
W
Warning buzzers
Brake system ....................................... 476
Downshifting..........................................173
Key reminder.......................................493
Open door ............................................477
Open hood...........................................484
Open moon roof ...............................487
Open trunk...........................................484
Open window.....................................487
Seat belt reminder..............................477
Warning lights ........................................... 77
ABS .......................................................... 476
Automatic headlight leveling
system...................................................477
Brake system ....................................... 476
Charging system ............................... 476
Electric power steering ...................477
Low fuel level........................................477
Malfunction indicator lamp........... 476
Master warning light .........................477
Open door ............................................477
Pre-collision system ..........................477
Seat belt reminder light ...................477
Slip indicator .........................................477
SRS............................................................ 476
Tire pressure........................................478
Warning messages.............................. 482
Alphabetical index
Washer .......................................................187
Checking................................................433
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................270
Switch........................................................ 187
Washing and waxing...........................406
Weight
Cargo capacity......................................161
Load limits.................................................161
Weight.....................................................524
Wheels...................................................... 446
Replacing wheels...............................446
Size............................................................534
Window lock switch ............................... 141
Windows..................................................... 141
Power windows..................................... 141
Rear window defogger...................372
Windshield wiper de-icer ................. 372
Windshield wipers .................................187
Intermittent windshield
wipers with interval adjuster ...... 187
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers....................................................189
Winter driving tips................................ 270
Wireless remote control .................... 100
Battery-Saving Function.................... 117
Locking/Unlocking.....................105, 111
Replacing the battery...................... 450
WMA disc ...............................................306
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
599
X
XM Satellite Radio...........................300
®
600
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
Trunk opener
Fuel filler door
P. 421
P. 111
P. 196
Hood lock release lever
Tire inflation pressure
P. 421
P. 534
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 194, 526
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P. 534
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
P. 527
Engine oil type
P. 527
IS350/300/200t_U (OM53D18U)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement